tender site improvements, hvac, lighting & electrical ... · site improvements, hvac, lighting...

Our mission is to educate learners to their fullest potential in preparation for life-long learning.

TENDER Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting & Electrical Upgrades

Phelps P.S. – Redbridge, ON The Near North District School Board invites qualified vendors to submit tenders for the above project.

Documents may be downloaded from this site with the vendor having the sole responsibility to register their intention to bid as stated. Any difficulty downloading tender documents, or questions as to how to obtain tender documents, contact the Purchasing Department, Near North District School Board, 963 Airport Road, North Bay, Ontario. Phone: 705-472-8170 or 1-800-278-4922. Complete proposal signed under seal, executed, and dated together submitted in sealed, opaque envelopes, clearly marked, “Tender – Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting & Electrical Upgrades – Phelps Central P.S.“, will be received until 2:00:00 p.m., local time, Thursday, May 24, 2018 at the address below.

PLEASE DELIVER DIRECTLY TO “PURCHASING DEPARTMENT”

Near North District School Board

963 Airport Road North Bay, ON P1C 1A5

Phone: 705-472-8170 / 1-800-278-4922

NOTE: The Board Office will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time. Tender forms submitted on or after 2:00:01 p.m. on the date noted above will be returned to the Bidder unopened. Please Note: All tender submissions will be opened publicly, shortly after the time of closing, on the day of closing and at the offices of the Near North District School Board, North Bay. The lowest or any proposal not necessarily accepted. The Near North District School Board is committed to supporting an inclusive and accessible environment. Please ask us how we may help you by contacting us at [email protected] David Thompson, Jackie Young, Chairperson Director of Education

mailto:[email protected]



TENDER Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting & Electrical Upgrades

Phelps P.S. – Redbridge, ON

A copy of this document may be downloaded. This document may be viewed only at the

Purchasing Department at the Near North District School Board, 963 Airport Road, North

Bay, ON or by contacting Charlotte Land, Supervisor of Purchasing at 705-472-8170 or 1-800-

278-4922, extension 5025. It is the sole responsibility of the interested vendor to forward by fax

705-472-9927 their intention to bid including their contact information on the following

Registration Form to the Purchasing Department, Near North District School Board Office,

North Bay.

No addenda or additional information will be forwarded to vendors/sub-trades

who are not registered.

NOTE: You will find the Education Act and the Map with our schools on our website just

above the Tenders.

NOTE: The Board Office will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time.

“VENDORS BIDDING ON PROJECTS WITH THE NEAR NORTH SCHOOL BOARD AGREE TO BE PAID BY ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (EFT/DIRECT DEPOSIT) SHOULD THEY BE THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER.”


REGISTRATION FORM

TENDER

Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting & Electrical Upgrades

Phelps P.S. – Redbridge, ON

If you intend to submit a proposal, it is in your best interest to submit this registration form by fax. No addenda or further information will be available to bidders who have not registered. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to register their intent in a timely fashion prior to last date for questions to be able to receive addenda. It is also the responsibility of the bidder to confirm receipt of this registration form by the Purchasing Department. NOTE: The Board Office

will be closed between 12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m. Do not deliver Tenders during that time.

Phone: 705-472-8170, Ext. 5025 or Ext. 5037 Fax back to: Purchasing Department – 705-472-9927

Name of Vendor

Street Address City Postal Code

Representative or Contact Person

Telephone fax e-mail address

I am a: General Contractor Sub-Contractor

PROJECT MANUAL

¯ VOLUME: 1 of 1

CONTENT: Specification

DIVISIONS: 01 to 48

PROJECT NO: 217102

Site Improvements, HVAC,

Lighting and Electrical Upgrades Phelps Central Public School Near North District School Board 19 Glenvale Drive, Redbridge, Ontario

TO C TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 1

Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and Electrical Upgrades Phelps Public School Near North District School Board

217102

April 2018

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTIONS PAGES DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00 01 06 - CONSULTANTS 1 SECTION 00 01 07 - PROFESSIONAL SIGNATURES AND SEALS 1 SECTION 00 11 11 - LIST OF DRAWINGS 1 SECTION 00 21 12 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 8 SECTION 00 31 21 - ASBESTOS SURVEY 1 ASBESTOS SURVEY – PHELPS CENTRAL PUBLIC SCHOOL 46 SECTION 00 41 10 - SAMPLE TENDER FORM 1 SECTION 00 41 12.02 - TENDER FORM 3 SECTION 00 52 13 - CONTRACT FORM 1 SECTION 00 56 13 - SUPPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS 3 SECTION 00 73 01 - SUPPLEMENTARY ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT 1 SECTION 00 73 02 - SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 13

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 00 01.01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - NNDSB 9 SAMPLE HOT WORK MPERMIT 4 SECTION 01 30 10 - ALTERATION PROCEDURES 4

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

NOT APPLICABLE


Page 2


217102

April 2018

DIVISION 05 - METALS

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS 3 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 20 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY 5 SECTION 06 41 11 - ARCHITECTURAL CABINETWORK 7

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 09 91 10 - PAINTING 8 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE


Page 3


217102

April 2018

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9 SECTION 15140 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 4 SECTION 15190 - IDENTIFICATION 6 SECTION 15260 - THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 4 SECTION 15270 - THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING 3 SECTION 15413 - DRAINAGE, WASTE AND VENT PIPING: CAST IRON AND COPPER 2 SECTION 15513 - HYDRONIC SYSTEMS - STEEL PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 1 SECTION 15515 - Hydronic Specialties 4 SECTION 15516 - Flexible Connections, Anchors, Joints and Guides 2 SECTION 15831 - Convectors and Finned Tube Radiation 3 SECTION 15832 – UNIT HEATERS 2 SECTION 15860 - COMMERCIAL FANS 3 SECTION 15891 - DUCTWORK, METALLIC, LOW PRESSURE - TO 500 PA 4 SECTION 15893 - FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK 2 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) 4

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9 SECTION 16111 - CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 4 SECTION 16122 - WIRES AND CABLES - 0 - 1000 V 3 SECTION 16132 – OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 3 SECTION 16151 - WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS - 0-1000 V 2 SECTION 16191 - FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS 2 SECTION 16421 - SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD 4 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING - SECONDARY 2 SECTION 16471 - PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE 10 SECTION 16477 - MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1 SECTION 16519 - EXIT LIGHTS 2 SECTION 16536 - UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING 3

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT APPLICABLE


Page 4


217102

April 2018

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING(HVAC)

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 00 00 - EARTHWORK 13 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING 5 SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING 3 SECTION 32 14 13 - PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING 2 SECTION 32 31 00 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 3 SECTION 32 32 23 - SEGMENTED CONCRETE RETAINING WALL SYSTEM 4


Page 5


217102

April 2018

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE


Page 6


217102

April 2018

DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

NOT APPLICABLE

00 01 06 CONSULTANTS

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CONSULTANTS .1 The following are the consultants who have prepared these Contract Documents:

.1 Prime Consultant (Architect):

Mitchell Jensen Architects Inc. 124a Main Street East North Bay, Ontario P1B 1A8 Phone: (705) 474 3250 FAX: (705) 474 0737

.2 Mechanical Engineer: Piotrowski Consultants Ltd 1820 Bond St North Bay, Ontario P1B 4V6 Phone: (705) 472-2536 FAX: (705) 476-5105

.3 Electrical Engineer: Piotrowski Consultants Ltd 1820 Bond St North Bay, Ontario P1B 4V6 Phone: (705) 472-2536 FAX: (705) 476-5105

END OF SECTION

00 01 07 PROFESSIONAL SIGNATURES AND SEALS

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 PROFESSIONAL SIGNATURES AND SEALS .1 The following seals and signatures are provided as required by Section 2.3.1 of the Ontario Building

Code and apply to the areas of expertise for which each consultant was commissioned and further apply to those drawings and specification sections which bear their name. .1 Prime Consultant (Architect):

.2 Mechanical Engineer:

.3 Electrical Engineer:

END OF SECTION

00 11 11 LIST OF DRAWINGS

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS .1 The Bidder is responsible for reviewing the documents received and ensuring that all documents are

complete. .2 The following is a list of all drawings issued for Tender: .3 Drawings:

Drawing No. Title ARCHITECTURAL A1.0 Existing/Demolition Plan, Site Plan, Notes and Legend A2.0 Site Plan Details A3.0 Main Floor Plan and Details MECHANICAL M101 Mechanical – Heating and Ventilation - Main Floor Demolition Plan M102 Mechanical – Heating and Ventilation - Main Floor Schedules M103 Mechanical – Heating and Ventilation – Heating Diagram Details ELECTRICAL E101 Electrical Power – Notes and Legend E102 Electrical Power – Main Floor Plan E201 Electrical Emergency Lighting – Main Floor Plan

END OF SECTION

00 21 12 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 INTENT OF TENDER .1 The intent of this invitation is to obtain offers from General Contractors to undertake site

Improvements, HVAC, lighting and electrical system upgrades at Phelps P.S. located at 19 Glenvale Drive, Redbridge, Ontario.

.2 Throughout the contract documents, the "Owner" shall mean "Near North District School Board”.

1.2 PURPOSE OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .1 The Instructions to Bidders define the terms of agreement between the Owner and Bidders relative to

the process of tendering, tender evaluation and potential acceptance of an offer received. .2 Submitting a tender constitutes acceptance by the Bidder of the terms of agreement defined herein. .3 The Owner accepts no obligations to Bidders unless explicitly stated herein. .4 The Owner is interested in receiving an offer which is designed to provide a high quality of

construction, an efficient and non-adversarial construction process, and a reasonable price, and it will consider criteria other than price in determining which if any tender to accept.

.5 The Owner encourages all bidders to consider the use of local resources and trades to perform the work when possible.

1.3 TENDER SUBMISSIONS .1 Tender Form - Submit in a sealed envelope, clearly marked “Tender Form – Site Improvements,

HVAC, Lighting and Electrical Upgrades - Phelps Public School will be received until 14:00:00 p.m. local time May 24th, 2018 by the Purchasing Department of the Near North District School Board located at 963 Airport Road, North Bay, ON, include:

.1 Complete Tender Form, signed and sealed; and

.2 Bid Bond; and

.3 Consent of Surety; and

.4 Proof of Insurance as noted in Article 1.22 of this Section; and

.5 WSIB Certificate of good standing as noted in Article 1.33 of this Section. .2 Tender Forms submitted at or after 14:00:01 p.m., on the date noted above, will be returned to the

Bidder unopened. .3 Tenders may not be submitted nor revised by telephone, or Facsimile Transmissions. .4 Tenders must be submitted on the Tender Form issued with Tender Documents. .5 All blanks on Tender Form must be filled in. .6 Tenders shall not be qualified by any condition without express written consent of the Consultant prior

to submission of Tender. .7 All requirements of the Tender Form must be completed. .8 Tender Form shall be submitted sealed in opaque envelopes clearly identified with Bidders Name,

Project Name and Owners name on the outside. .9 Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of Tender in the manner and time prescribed. .10 Bidders shall be solely responsible for verifying they have received all of the Addenda issued. .11 Submit proof of insurance coverage (refer to 1.22 this Section) and WSIB Certificate of Good

Standing (refer to 1.23 this Section) with the Tender Form.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

1.4 TENDERING COSTS .1 All costs associated with the preparation and delivery of a tender shall be paid by the Bidder. .2 The Owner is not responsible for compensation of tendering costs under any circumstances.

1.5 DEFINITIONS .1 Owner: Near North District School Board. .2 Tender Documents: Documents listed in Table of Contents, and addenda issued by the Consultant

during the tender period. .3 Addendum/Addenda: Supplementary information, clarification or amendments to the tender

documents, issued by the Consultant during the tender period to all those who have received tender documents. Addenda will be in written and/or drawn format and each issue will be numbered and dated.

.4 Tender: An offer received by the Owner in response to this invitation, and the act of submitting an

.5 Bidder: A person, corporation, partnership, sole proprietorship or other entity which has submitted a Tender before the aforementioned deadline. The word "Tenderer" is synonymous.

.6 Tender Form: A form supplied with the Tender Documents to be completed as an offer to undertake work described by contract documents. This form identifies primarily Base Bid, and is signed and sealed by Tenderer.

.7 Base Bid: A stipulated sum (price) for the supply and installation of all materials and equipment specified and shown and the execution of the Work described by the tender documents.

.8 Acceptable Alternate: An alternate product, material, manufacturer, method or procedure to that specified which has been pre-approved by the Consultant and identified within the specification, and no further submission or request is required. Prices for the use of Acceptable Alternates are included in the Base Bid.

.9 Approved Alternate: An alternate product, material, manufacturer, method or procedure to that specified which has been approved by the Consultant during the tender period, and confirmation of its acceptability has been issued as an addendum. Prices for the use of approved alternates are to be included in the Base Bid.

.10 Prescribed Alternate: The specification and the Tender Form identify specific alternative products, materials, manufacturers, methods or procedures which must be priced as additions to, or deletions from, the Base Bid. Prices for the use of Prescribed Alternates are not included in Base Bid. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject Prescribed Alternates.

.11 Bidder Proposed Alternates: The Bidder may propose alternate materials, methods or sub-contractors for consideration of the Consultant and the Owner without prior approval, and include a brief description of the proposed alternate and the price to be added or deleted from the Base Bid if the Owner accepts the alternate proposed. Prices for the use of Bidder Proposed Alternates are not included in Base Bid. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject Bidder Proposed Alternates.

.12 Acceptable Alternate Manufacturer: A manufacturer specifically named as such in the specification, which is acceptable, provided that the specific product manufactured by the alternate manufacturer is equivalent in quality, performance and operating characteristics to the specified material or product by the specified manufacturer. Products manufactured by Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers may be included in the Base, but if the product is determined to not be equivalent upon review by the Consultant, the specified product by the specified manufacturer must be provided with no change in the contract price.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

.13 Take Out Price: The stipulated price of a specific area of the Work identified on the Contract Documents and included in the Base Bid, which, at the Owners discretion, may be deleted from the scope of work prior to execution of the construction contract, and the quoted price deducted from the Base Bid in determining the Contract Price.

.14 Separate Price: The stipulated price of specific areas of the Work identified on the Contract Documents, which is not included in the Base Bid, which may, at the Owner's discretion be added to the scope of work prior to the execution of the construction contract, and the quoted price added to the Base Bid Price in determining the Contract Price.

.15 Unit Price: The stipulated price of specific units of the Work identified on the Contract Documents, for which prescribed quantities are included in the Base Bid, and which, pricing shall remain in force for the duration of the Contract. Unit prices include all additional overhead and profit. No additional mark-ups are permitted for valuations submitted under this method. Unit Prices do not include the H.S.T. Valuations are based on the actual unit quantity used, and will be added or subtracted from, any prescribed quantities outlined the construction contract, at the quoted price after the total quantity has been determined and is subject to review by the Consultant and Owner.

1.6 EXAMINATION/REGISTRATION .1 Tender Documents are available for download on the Near North District School Board (NNDSB)

website for downloading and printing. www.nearnorthschools.ca. .2 Verify documents are complete; notify Consultant should documents be incomplete. .3 Examine Tender Documents for discrepancies or omissions, and notify the Consultant of discrepancies

or omissions, no fewer than five (5) calendar days prior to the date specified for closing. .4 All tender documents are complimentary and must be read together to ascertain a complete

description of the Work.

1.7 QUERIES/ADDENDA .1 Direct questions to the Near North District School Board, TEL. (705) 472-8170 or 1-800-278-4922, Ext.

#5025, FAX (705) 472-9927, attention Charlotte Land or via email to [email protected]. It is the Bidder's responsibility to ensure any emailed or faxed questions have been received by the Board.

.2 Addenda may be issued during the Tender period. All addenda become part of the Tender Documents. Include costs arising from addenda in the Base Bid.

.3 Verbal answers to inquiries and clarifications are only binding when confirmed by addenda.

.4 Clarification requests by bidders must be received not less than five (5) calendar days before date set for receipt of bids.

.5 Confirm the completeness of all addenda.

.6 Insert on the Tender Form in the space provided the number and date of all addenda received.

1.8 PRODUCT/SYSTEM OPTIONS .1 The specification requires the use of specific products, materials, manufacturers, methods and

procedures, and may also identify Acceptable Alternates to those requirements, within the specification.

.2 Alternatives to products, materials, manufacturers, methods and procedures which are specified or Acceptable Alternates, will be considered by the Consultant upon detailed submissions received no less than ten (10) calendar days before the date specified for receipt of Tenders, and if accepted will be identified as an Approved Alternate by addendum.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

.3 The Base Bid includes the use of products, materials, manufacturers, methods and procedures which are specified, or an Acceptable Alternate, or an Approved Alternate, and the Bidder may chose which to use.

.4 If an Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers is identified in the specification without specific Acceptable Alternate products, the products manufactured by the alternate manufacturer must be equivalent in quality, performance and operating characteristics to that which is specified to be acceptable for use, and such acceptability is not guaranteed by the identification of the alternate manufacturer or supplier in the specification. If the product manufactured by the alternate manufacturer is determined by the Consultant to not be equivalent, provide the specified product at no change in contract price. Bidders may submit specific product data by an Acceptable Alternate Manufacturer during the tendering period for review and if acceptable, the product will be identified as an Approved Alternate by addendum.

.5 Base Bid includes the cost of changes in the Work required to accommodate Acceptable Alternates , Approved Alternates and equivalent products by acceptable alternate suppliers.

.6 Bidder Proposed Alternates may be included in the space provided on the Tender Form without prior approval, but the price for using Bidder Proposed Alternates is not included in the Base Bid Price.

.7 Additions to, or deletions from, the Base Bid for the incorporation of Prescribed Alternates must be provided on the Tender Form.

.8 The price adjustments offered for Prescribed Alternates and Bidder Proposed Alternates include all changes to the Work required for their incorporation into the Work.

.9 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject Bidder Proposed Alternates and Prescribed Alternates.

.10 If a Bidder Proposed Alternate or a Prescribed Alternate is accepted by the Owner, the Base Bid will be adjusted as offered in determining the Contract Price.

1.9 IDENTIFICATION .1 List on the Tender Form all subcontractors and suppliers, to be employed in the execution of this

contract for the categories of work identified, together with telephone numbers for each Sub-Contractor or supplier listed.

.2 It is suggested that the Contractor give careful consideration to the suitability of the sub-contractors listed on the Tender Form.

.3 In listing a sub-contractor on the Tender Form, it is understood that if the Owner accepts the Contractor's tender, a contract is deemed to exist between the Contractor and the named Sub-Contractor for the value of the Sub-Contractor's Tender.

.4 The Consultant may, upon acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's tender, notify the sub-contractor's named on the Tender Form that they have been so named.

.5 The Contractor shall employ only the subcontractors and suppliers listed in these categories. Deviation from this list must be approved in writing by the Consultant in response to a written proposal which must include an explanation and a written release of liability signed by the rejected sub-contractor, acceptable to the Consultant. In reviewing such a request, the Consultant shall be authorized to enter into discussions with both sub-contractors, to verify the reason for the requested change.

1.10 EXAMINATION OF SITE .1 Carefully examine and study all of the Contract Documents and inspect the Site of the work in order to

determine all conditions affecting the work and associated costs. .2 The act of submitting a tender is confirmation that the Bidder has visited the project site and

surrounding properties and become familiar with the place of work.


Page 5


217102

April 2018

.3 Visits to the site must be arranged in advance with the owner’s designee, Mr. Steve Sutton –maintenance services supervisor, cell number 1-705-840-8210.

.4 No formal site visit will be held.

1.11 TIMING OF WORK .1 Time is of the essence in this contract. .2 Commence preparations for the Work immediately following contract award. .3 Work will be required to be undertaken and completed during the summer break which

commences on July 3rd, 2018. Attain Substantial Completion of the Work no later than August 24th, 2018. Undertaking of the Work while classes are in session will not be permitted.

.4 Once the Work has commenced, work continuously towards completion. Periods of inactivity on site will not be permitted without prior consent of the Owner.

1.12 BID BOND .1 Each tender shall be submitted with a Bid Bond in the name of an approved surety, made payable to

owner in an amount not less than 10% (ten percent) of the Tender Price, as a guarantee that the Bidder will, if the tender is accepted, execute a general construction contract as specified herein and provide the specified Performance and Labour and Materials Bonds within ten (10) days of acceptance

1.13 CONSENT OF SURETY .1 Submit with the Tender Form and Bid Bond, a "Consent of Surety" stating that the named Surety will

supply the specified Performance Bond and Labour and Material Payment Bonds for this project.

1.14 PERFORMANCE BOND .1 Upon acceptance by the Owner, the successful Tenderer shall execute with an established Surety, a

Performance Bond, in an amount equal to fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price and submit the Bond to the Owner within ten (10) days of acceptance of the tender, and prior to commencing activity on the site.

1.15 LABOUR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND .1 Upon acceptance by the Owner, the successful Tenderer shall execute with an established Surety, a

Labour and Materials Payment Bond in the amount of fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price, and submit the Bond to the Consultant within ten (10) days of acceptance of the tender, and prior to commencing activity on the site.

1.16 BONDING COSTS .1 Include the cost of all Bonds in the Base Bid Price.

1.17 TENDER SIGNING .1 The Tender shall be signed under seal by the Bidder. .2 Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert

the words "Sole proprietor" under signature. Affix seal. .3 Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word

"Partner" against each signature. Affix seal against each signature.


Page 6


217102

April 2018

.4 Corporation or Limited Company: Signature of duly authorized signing officers in their normal signatures. Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts against each signature. Affix the Corporate seal. If the tender is signed by an official other than the President and Secretary of the company or the President-Secretary-Treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law resolution of the Board of Directors authorizing them to do so must also be submitted with the tender in the tender envelope.

.5 If the bidder is a joint venture, each party to the joint venture shall execute the Tender under seal in the manner appropriate to such party.

1.18 DURATION OF OFFER .1 Tenders shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of sixty (60) days after

the Tender closing date.

1.19 TAXES .1 The Base Bid (Tender Price) excludes the Harmonized Sales Tax (HST). .2 Base Bid (Tender Price) includes all other applicable taxes, duties levies, etc.

1.20 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Cash Allowances shall be included in the Base Bid in accordance with Part 4 of the General Conditions

of the Contract. Cash Allowances are identified in Section 01 00 01 – General Requirements.

1.21 COST BREAKDOWN .1 The Contractor shall provide a breakdown of Tender Price by building components within three (3)

days of request from Consultant.

1.22 INSURANCE .1 Submit proof with the Tender Form, that the Contractor has in place the insurance coverage required

by CCDC 2 contract.

1.23 WORKER’S SAFETY INSURANCE BOARD .1 Submit a copy of the most current certificate of good standing from the Worker’s Safety Insurance

Board (WSIB) with the Tender Form.

1.24 "FORMALITY" OF TENDER .1 The Owner reserves the sole discretionary right to declare any irregular Tender to be "informal". .2 Tender Forms or enclosures that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible,

obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may be declared "informal", at the Owner's sole discretion.

.3 Failure to provide a security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may result in the tender being declared "informal".

.4 Failure to fill in all the blanks on the Tender Form, or the insertion of multiple, or otherwise non-committal or confusing entries on the Tender Form may render the Tender "informal" at the Owner's sole discretion.

.5 Any tender which the Owner deems to be "informal" may be rejected at the Owners sole discretion.


Page 7


217102

April 2018

1.25 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE .1 The Owner reserves the sole discretionary right to accept or reject any or all bids received. .2 The Owner will evaluate the bids received and identify the offer which represents "best value”, as

interpreted, in its own best interest, by the Owner, in its sole and absolute discretion; this may not be the lowest priced tender.

.3 In making a determination, the Owner reserves the right to objectively and reasonably consider any criterion which it considers to be relevant in its own best interest; which may include, among other criteria, consideration of past performance of the Bidder, based on the Owner’s experience and/or experience reported by individuals which have knowledge of the Bidder’s past performance.

.4 If requested by the Owner, Bidders will meet with the Owner to discuss their offer.

.5 Acceptance by the Owner will be communicated by the issuance of a letter of acceptance to the successful bidder, by the Owner or by the Consultant on behalf of the Owner.

.6 All Bidders will be notified of the acceptance or not of their tender.

.7 The Owner is not obligated to provide Bidders with details of its determination of best value.

1.26 CONTRACTOR’S HEALTH & SAFETY POLICY .1 Bidders are required to have in place a company health and safety policy. The Contractor’s health and

safety policy shall be in the form of a type written manual and shall in general, identify specific roles and responsibilities of the Contractor’s supervisors, employees and sub-trades, provide protocols for injury and accident prevention and protocols for dealing with workplace injuries.

.2 Prior to contract award, the successful Bidder will be required to submit a copy of their health and safety manual to the Owner for review and acceptance within 3 days, if requested to do so by the Consultant. Failure to provide an acceptable health and safety manual within a reasonable time period may result in the Bidder’s tender being declared informal.

1.27 CRIMINAL BACKGROUND CHECK .1 If required by the Board, the successful Bidder covenants and agrees to assist the Board in complying

with same by providing the Board or such other entity as the Board may designate with a criminal background check covering offences under the Criminal Code, the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act and any other offences with would be revealed by a search of the automated Criminal Records Retrieval System maintained by the RCMP (“Criminal Background Check”), together with an Offence Declaration in a Board-approved form for every individual or employee of the successful Bidder who may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis at a school site of the Board, prior to the occurrence of such possible direct contact and on or before September 1st each year thereafter with respect to the Offence Declarations. For the purpose of this Request for Proposal/Tender/Quotation, the Board shall determine in its sole and unfettered discretion whether an individual or employee of the successful Bidder may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis.

.2 The successful Bidder further acknowledges and agrees that the contract between the Board and the successful Bidder to be entered into pursuant to the terms hereof shall contain provisions of indemnification and provisions allowing the Board to terminate same in the event the successful Bidder fails to provide the Board with a Criminal Background Check and an Offence Declaration for every individual or employee who may come into direct contact with pupils on a regular basis at a school site of the Board, prior to the occurrence of such possible direct contact and on or before September 1st each year thereafter with respect to the Offence Declaration.


Page 8


217102

April 2018

.3 In addition, the contract will contain provisions that will allow the Board, or such other entity as the Board may designate, upon review of the Criminal Background Check provided to determine that an individual or employee will not be permitted on a school site in circumstances where direct contact with students is probable.

END OF SECTION

00 31 21 ASBESTOS SURVEY

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 ASBESTOS SURVEY .1 The following is the Owner’s asbestos survey report. .2 This Survey Report was prepared by its author for the Owner and is hereby offered to the bidder in

good faith for general information and guidance. The Consultant assumes no responsibility or liability for the completeness and accuracy of the information contained in this report.

.3 Include in the Base Bid Price, abatement of only those existing asbestos containing materials indicated on the drawings to be removed. If abatement of other building materials not currently indicated on the drawings is deemed necessary once the Work proceeds, it will be addressed as a change in the scope of Work.

.4 The Asbestos Survey is provided for the Contractor’s information The Contractor shall review the report and advise the Consultant in advance of any areas where they expect existing asbestos containing building materials to be disturbed as part of the Work, where abatement is not currently specified to be included in the Work.

.5 Should there be a discrepancy between recommendations contained in the report and the requirements of the Contract Documents, the latter shall govern. Advise the Consultant in writing prior to proceeding with the Work.

END OF SECTION

ACM ReportPhelps Central

Near North District School Board (NNDSB) ensures that asbestos surveys of its schools are conducted to identify the extent, type and condition of asbestos containing material (ACM). The surveys include:

• inspection of the interior of the facility to identify the extent, type and condition of potential Asbestos Containing Material (ACM);• collection of representative samples of potential ACM; and• submission of samples for laboratory analysis.

This work continues on an ongoing basis and these reports are updated as the inventory of ACM changes as a result of new information or construction work.

Asbestos is a general name for highly fibrous silicate minerals which are valued for their heat and chemical resistant properties. Although there are many types of asbestos, commercially significant types include chrysotile, amosite and crocidolite.

The construction industry has historically been the biggest user of asbestos: in pipe and boiler insulation, as sprayed insulation or fireproofing in buildings, and as a component of building materials in vinyl flooring, ceiling tiles, roofing felts, shingles, etc. Asbestos was also used in commercial products, such as gaskets, sealants, paper and plastic. Although the use of asbestos has recently decreased dramatically, its past widespread use means that it will continue to pose a potential hazard to the renovation and demolition sectors of the construction industry.

Introduction

Background

Friday, February 03, 2017

Friday, February 03, 2017 Page 1 of 44

Area by area observations of accessible locations of the building were made to identify the presence of materials suspected to contain asbestos. The survey included but was not limited to: sprayed on fireproofing, plaster, thermal insulation, ceiling tiles, wall material, vinyl and linoleum flooring material, drywall jointing compound, caulking and materials. The extent, type and condition of potential ACM were documented. The asbestos survey was non-intrusive and did not include inspection of non-accessible mechanical risers, materials which might be enclosed in wall cavities, or roofing and other exterior materials.

Motors, kilns, boilers or piping and valves were not disassembled to determine composition or the possible presence of ACM. However, asbestos may be present in gaskets, caulking, sealants, etc. associated with piping, valves or other equipment.

Following the collection of observations, samples of the potential ACM identified were collected and submitted for laboratory analysis.

Samples for laboratory analysis were submitted to International Asbestos Testing Laboratories which is accredited by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. Polarized light microscopy (PLM) analysis was performed using the procedures detailed in the US Environmental Protection Agency “Methods for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials, US EPA Report No. 600/R-93/116”. The detection limit for asbestos analysis was 0.25% by weight. Asbestos, if present, was identified as one (1) or more fibrous asbestos minerals, including chrysotile, amosite and crocidolite.

Inspection

Laboratory Analysis

The friability of an ACM is a measure of the ease with which the material can be ground or pulverized, and provides a theoretical measure of the ease with which asbestos fibres can be released into the air. Friable ACM is generally identified as material which can be crumbled, pulverized and/or reduced to powder by hand pressure, such as ceiling tiles, thermal insulation and fire proofing. Non-friable ACM is hard product with bound asbestos, such as floor tiles, pipes, siding, etc. These products pose no danger of releasing airborne fibres unless cut, sawn, ground or sanded.

Under Ontario Regulation 278/05 “Designated Substance — asbestos on construction projects and in buildings and repair operations”, material containing 0.5 percent (%) or more asbestos by weight is considered to be ACM requiring specialised handling, removal and disposal practices. Sections of the regulation dealing specifically with asbestos identify the general duties of employers, requirements for health assessments, training and project notification. The regulation also provides requirements for personal protective equipment and stipulates exposure limits.

Special Note

Black chalkboards in the schools may be porcelain enameled steel. However, any chalkboard of fibrous material should be suspected until proven otherwise with testing regardless of their colour. Currently, all fibrous light green and dark green chalkboards have been Confirmed ACM.


28 Phelps Central

Redbridge 1955circaLocated in Contact:472-5567

-

Phelps Central

The data which follows is categorised by broad group according to condition. These are then further divided according to Accessibility.


Copy room in room 4The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 16 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT5 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, small circular pattern, 2 x 4 feet and cut to size. Aprox 154 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 170 ft2New Floor tile Jan 2012 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Custodial closet next to room 8The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.

Material: CT4 : Brown fibrous tile with white coating 1 X 1 circular pattern Aprox 30 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 30 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-2C. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Hallway from room 22 to exit at room 1The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable

Material: CT3 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, tight patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 20 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Hallway from the exit at room 25 to room 12This area includes a foyer and a vestibule. The fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT11 : White ceiling tile with medium tight pattern 2x4 or cut to size Aprox 1250 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 368 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: CT4 : Brown fibrous tile with white coating 1 X 1 circular pattern Aprox 368 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 516 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 1294 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-2C. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 52 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-3A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PL2 : Texture coat (white); as may be seen on drywall or plaster. Aprox 370 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-14A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 368 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-7A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Principal's officeNo suspect material was noted above the ceiling.

Material: CT1 : Ceiling Tile, Stippled White, 2 X 4 feet and ct to size Aprox 24 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 264 ft2New floor tile Jan 2012 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room 1The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CB1 : Chalkboard; Black; May be fibreboard. Aprox 128 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CB2 : Chalkboard; Dark Green; May be fibreboard. Aprox 60 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room 10The area above the ceiling is inaccessible. The fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable

Material: CT12 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, 1 X 1 Aprox 770 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT2 : Vinyl floor tile; 9 X 9 inches; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 770 ft2New floor tile July 2010 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Room 11The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 22 ft2 Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable



Material: CB2 : Chalkboard; Dark Green; May be fibreboard. Aprox 96 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT12 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, 1 X 1 Aprox 704 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 80 ft2Floor tiles changed July 2010 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room 14The area above the ceiling is inaccessible. The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT12 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, 1 X 1 Aprox 242 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 252 ft2Floor tile changed Jul 2010 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable



Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 170 ft2New drywall on ceiling only Aug 2012 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 8 ft2New joint compound ceiling only Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP1 : Insulated pipe (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 32 ft2New pipe insulation Aug 2012 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 28 ft2New elbows Aug 2012 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room 16The area above the ceiling is inaccessible. The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT4 : Brown fibrous tile with white coating 1 X 1 circular pattern Aprox 66 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT2 : Vinyl floor tile; 9 X 9 inches; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 66 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Poor.

Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable

Material: CB3 : Chalkboard; Light Green; May be fibreboard. Aprox 80 ft2 Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable

Material: DW1 : Drywall, Contemporary 4 X 8 feet sheets cut to fit. Aprox 570 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT4 : Vinyl floor - large sheets cut to size. (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 254 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: JC1 : Jointing compound used for seems and corners of drywall. Aprox 57 ft2 Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Moderate (accessible by service and/or custodial staff). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable



Material: PL1 : Plaster (on metal or wood lathe or other surface). Aprox 132 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room 20This area includes storage. The fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area and above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 1230 ft2New Floor tile Summer of 2011 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room 22 - GymnasiumThis area includes the under stage storage. The fibreglass insulation on the pipes in the area and the brown wooden acoustical panels in the area are not considered to be suspect materials. There is no area above the ceiling in this room.

Material: PL2 : Texture coat (white); as may be seen on drywall or plaster. Aprox 92 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-14A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 3 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-7A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room 23The fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: CV1 : White or Grey canvas (as may be seen in flex ducts of HVAC systems. Aprox 2 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 286 ft2This material tested positive. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable



Material: CT2 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, loose patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 16 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT3 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, tight patern, 2 X 4 feet and cut to size Aprox 32 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: CT5 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, small circular pattern, 2 x 4 feet and cut to size. Aprox 146 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: CV1 : White or Grey canvas (as may be seen in flex ducts of HVAC systems. Aprox 2 ft2This material was noted above the ceiling. Suspected Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Material: PL2 : Texture coat (white); as may be seen on drywall or plaster. Aprox 280 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-14A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 10 ft2New pipe insulation and elbows Aug 2012 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room 26No suspect material was noted above the ceiling.

Material: CT5 : Ceiling Tile, Smooth White, small circular pattern, 2 x 4 feet and cut to size. Aprox 200 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Room 27The fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area and above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 312 ft2New floor tile summer 2014 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 768 ft2New floor tile summer 2014 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Room 4This area includes a washroom. The fibreglass insulation on the pipe above the ceiling is not considered to be a suspect material.

Material: CT1 : Ceiling Tile, Stippled White, 2 X 4 feet and ct to size Aprox 114 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 216 ft2New floor tile Jan 2012 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Material: PL2 : Texture coat (white); as may be seen on drywall or plaster. Aprox 20 ft2This material tested positive. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT2 : Vinyl floor tile; 9 X 9 inches; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 748 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable

Material: FT2 : Vinyl floor tile; 9 X 9 inches; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 176 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-4A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable



Visible

Friable




Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable



Material: CT4 : Brown fibrous tile with white coating 1 X 1 circular pattern Aprox 196 ft2 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Fair.

Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 180 ft2Floor tile changed jul 2010 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Room 9This area includes a washroom. The area above the ceiling is inaccessible.


Visible

Friable

Material: FT1 : Vinyl floor tile; 1 X 1 foot; (blue, white, green, brown, yellow) Aprox 242 ft2Floor tiles changed Jul 2010 Confirmed NON-Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated High (accessible by all building occupants). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Storage room in the gymThere is no area above the ceiling in this room. The fibreglass insulation on the pipe in the area is not considered to be a suspect material.


Visible

Friable

Material: PP2 : Insulated elbow, t-joint, valve or other. (unknown; not fibreglass) Aprox 5 ft2This material tested positive. Refer to sample 28-7A. Confirmed Asbestos Containing Material. Accessibility is rated Low (accessible by service and/or custodial staff with ladder). The condition was last rated as Good.

Visible

Friable


Washroom next to room 24No suspect material was noted above the ceiling.


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


Visible

Friable


00 41 10 SAMPLE TENDER FORM

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 TENDER FORM .1 The following is a blank copy of the "Tender Form" which is to be used for the purposes of submitting a

Tender, in accordance with Section 00 21 12 Instructions to Bidders.

END OF SECTION

00 41 12.02 TENDER FORM

Page 1


217102

April 2018

TENDER FORM PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Contractor’s Name: _______________________________________________________________ .1 Pursuant to, and in compliance with, Section 00 21 12 - Instructions to Bidders, and the Contract

Documents relating to the construction of Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and Electrical Upgrades - Phelps Public School, as per documents issued by Mitchell Jensen Architects inc. including the Addenda numbered and dated as follows:

.1 _________________________________ .4 _________________________________

.2 _________________________________ .5 _________________________________

.3 _________________________________ .6 _________________________________ .2 The undersigned, having become thoroughly familiar with the Terms and Conditions of the Contract

Documents, with local conditions affecting the performance, and the costs of the work at the place proposed, and having fully inspected the site, hereby offers and agrees to fully perform the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, including the furnishing of all labour, materials, equipment, permits, fees, duties, and all taxes except the Harmonized Sales Tax (HST), for the stipulated price, in lawful Canadian Funds as indicated in Article 1.2 Base Bid Price.

1.2 Base Bid Price .1 dollars.

($ ), in lawful Canadian funds, (excluding HST) In addition to the above price, applicable Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) will be charged.

.2 The undersigned hereby accepts the terms of the Instructions to Bidders as related to the tendering

process and acknowledges that the Owner has the right to reject this Tender, but that this Tender shall remain open and irrevocable for a period of 60 days from the date of closing.

.3 If notified in writing by the Owner, or a representative on behalf of the Owner, of the acceptance of this tender, within 60 days of the tender closing date, the undersigned agrees to within 10 days thereafter: .1 Commence preparation for the Work immediately and barring delays as prescribed in the

Contract Documents, complete the Work within the duration specified in Section 01 00 01 General Requirements.

.2 Execute a “Canadian Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 (2008) Stipulated Price Contract”, including amendments contained in the Specification.

.3 Provide a Performance Bond, and a Labour and Materials Payment Bond satisfactory to the Owner, as specified in the Contract Documents.

.4 The undersigned declares that no person, firm or corporation other than the undersigned has any interest in this tender or in the proposed contract for which this tender is submitted.

.5 The undersigned acknowledges that the Tender Price includes the Cash Allowances specified in the Section 01 00 01 General Requirements.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

1.3 Separate Prices The following Separate Prices are for specific areas of work which, at the Owner's discretion, may ADDED to the Work and the Base Bid Price in establishing Contract Value. Separate Prices do not include the H.S.T. .1 Add Reconstruction of Existing Basketball Court

Refer to A/A1.0. Add to the scope of the Work, full reconstruction of the existing asphalt paved basketball court including supply and installation 2 (two) new basketball goal assemblies and foundations per detail D/A2.0. ADD $______________________

1.4 Sub-Contractors The following Sub-Contractors and Suppliers will be engaged by the undersigned to complete the Work described in the Contract Documents. See Section 00 21 12 Instructions to Bidders for details regarding this list, its use and implications. .1 Earthwork / Excavation

.2 Chain Link Fencing Installation

.3 Asphalt Paving

.4 Landscaping

.5 Poured-in-Place Concrete

.6 Metal Fabrications

.7 Finish Carpentry

.8 Architectural Cabinetwork

.9 Painting

.10 Mechanical

.11 Electrical

1.5 Alternate Prices - Bidder Proposed As per Section 00 21 12 - Instructions to Bidders, the following prices are offered as additions or

deletions to the Tender Price for the use of alternative methods or materials to those specified or identified as "Base Bid". These alternates are proposed by the Bidder and shall only be incorporated into the Contract if expressly accepted by the Owner. Alternate Prices do not include the H.S.T.

Description ADD DELETE

__________________________ $________________________ $________________________


Page 3


217102

April 2018

Signed, sealed and submitted for and on behalf of:

____________________________________

Company Name

____________________________________

Address

____________________________________ ___________________________________

Name and Title Witness Name and Title

____________________________________ ___________________________________

Signature Witness Signature

____________________________________

Date

Affix Corporate Seal over signature

00 52 13 CONTRACT FORM

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 CONTRACT FORM .1 The following is a copy of CCDC Document 2, Stipulated Price Contract, 2008, provided for reference

only. .2 Article A-5 Payment including percentage holdback, and interest is completed and will form

part the completed contract. .3 The balance of the Contract Form will be completed upon acceptance of a tender.

END OF DOCUMENT

00 56 13 SUPPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 DEFINITIONS .1 CCDC 2-2008 Edition, Stipulated Price Contract as may be amended, forms the basis of Definitions

between the Owner and Contractor. .2 These Definitions are bound to the CCDC 2 Definitions and CCDC 2 General Conditions.

1.2 SUPPLEMENTARY DEFINITIONS TO CCDC 2-2008 .1 Add the following words and terms to the CCDC 2 Definitions.

.1 Addendum

A document that amends the Bid Documents during the Bidding Period and becomes part of the Contract Documents when a Contract is executed. (Plural: Addenda):

.2 Agreement

The signed and sealed legal instrument binding parties in a Contract, describing in strict terms their mutual arrangement, roles and responsibilities, commencement, and completion responsibilities.

.3 Alternative Price

The amount stipulated by a Bidder for an Alternative and stated as an addition, a deduction, or no change to the Bid Price.

.4 Bid

To offer as a Bid stating for what price a Contractor will assume a Contract.

.5 Bid Documents A set of documents consisting of the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, Contract Documents, and other

information issued for the benefit of Bidders to prepare and submit a Bid.

.6 Bid Form The specific and detailed form used to collect information about a Bid.

.7 Bidding The process of preparing and submitting a Bid.

.8 Construction Documents The Drawings and Project Manual. When combined with a Contract and Contract conditions, these

documents form the Contract Documents.

.9 Contingency Allowance An additional monetary amount added to a Project cost estimate and designated to cover

unpredictable or unforeseen items of Work. The amount is usually based on some percentage of the estimated cost and expended and adjusted by Change Order. It is not intended to cover additions to the scope of Work.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.10 Cost Plus Contract A Contract under which a Contractor is reimbursed for the direct and indirect costs for the

performance of a Contract and, in addition, is paid a Fee for services. The Fee is usually stated as a stipulated price or as a percentage of cost.

.11 General Conditions

That part of the Contract Documents which sets forth many of the rights, responsibilities and relationships of the parties involved in a Contract.

.12 Install

To remove from site storage, move or transport to intended location, install in position, connect to utilities, repair site caused damage, and make ready for use.

.13 Instructions To Bidders

Instructions contained in the Bid Documents to convey an Owner's expectations and criteria associated with submitting a Bid.

.14 Section

A portion of a Project Specification covering one or more segments of the total Work or requirements. Sections are included in a Project manual as required to meet Project requirements.

.15 Standard

A document describing a grade or a level of quality, which has been established by a recognized agency or organization, utilizing an internal voting process.

.16 Separate Price

A separate price for work to be added to the base price if selected by the Owner. This price type is not a part of the base bid price.

.17 Stipulated Price

An amount set forth in a Stipulated Price Contract as the total payment for the performance of the Work. Sometimes referred to as a stipulated sum or a lump sum stipulated price.

.18 Submittals

Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the Contractor, such as:

- Shop Drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or characteristics, before the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the Work; and

- Record drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance of the Work.

.19 Supply

To acquire or purchase, ship or transport to the site, unload, remove packaging to permit inspection for damage, re-package, replace damaged items, and safely store on-site.

.20 Tender

A term that was formally abandoned by CCDC and the Canadian Construction industry in the early 1980's in favour of the preferred term Bid.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

.21 Unit Price

The amount payable for a single unit of Work as stated in a Schedule of Prices. Unit prices include all additional overhead and profit. No additional mark-ups are permitted for valuations submitted under this method.

END OF SECTION

00 73 01 SUPPLEMENTARY ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 The Articles of Agreement of the Stipulated Price Contract CCDC 2, 2008 are amended as follows:

.1 ARTICLE A-6 – RECEIPT AND ADDRESSES FOR NOTICES IN WRITING .1 Delete Article A-6.1 and substitute new article 6.1:

.1 6.1 Notices in Writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant shall be

considered to have been received by the addressee on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or by commercial courier or if sent during normal business hours by fax and addressed as set out below. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the next business day if sent by fax after normal business hours or if sent by overnight commercial courier. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the fifth Working Day following the date of mailing, if sent by pre-paid registered post, when addressed as set out below. An address for a party may be changed by Notice in Writing to the other party setting out the new address in accordance with this Article.

END OF SECTION

00 73 02 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

Where a General Condition or paragraph of the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract is deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the numbering of the remaining General Conditions or paragraphs shall remain unchanged, and the numbering of the deleted item will be retained, unused.

The General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract CCDC 2, 2008 are amended as follows:

1.1 GC 1.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .1 Add to the end of subparagraph 1.1.2.2

.1

.2 Except where the Consultant shall be indemnified as a third party beneficiary as provided in subparagraphs 9.2.7.4, 9.2.8.4, 9.5.2.4 and 9.5.3.4 and in 12.1.1.

.2 Add new subparagraph 1.1.7.5:

.1 1.1.7.5 In case of discrepancies, noted materials and annotations shall take precedence

over graphic indications in the Contract Documents.

.3 Delete 1.1.7.1 and substitute new paragraph 1.1.7.1:

.1 the order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, shall be .1 Supplementary Articles of Agreement, .2 the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, .3 Supplementary Definitions, .4 the Definitions, .5 Supplementary Conditions, .6 the General Conditions, .7 Division 1 of the Specifications, .8 technical Specifications, .9 material and finishing schedules, .10 the Drawings.

.4 Delete 1.1.8. and substitute new paragraph 1.1.8.

.1 ".8 The Owner shall provide the Contractor, without charge, a digital copy of the Contract

Documents, in Adobe PDF format, to perform the Work. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all hard / paper copies of Contract Documents required for their own use, for building permit application and for 3 (three) Contract sets."

1.2 GC 2.2 ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT .1 Delete paragraph 2.2.4. in its entirety. .2 Add the word “schedules after the word “techniques in paragraph 2.2.6. .3 Add to the end of the second sentence of paragraph 2.2.6. “or to adhere to the construction schedule.” .4 Add at the end of paragraph 2.2.9. “The Owner and the Contractor shall waive any claims against the

Consultant arising out of the making of such interpretations and findings in accordance with paragraphs 2.2.7., 2.2.8. and 2.2.9”.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.5 Delete the comma after the word “submittals” and add the words “which are provided” before the words “in accordance” in paragraph 2.2.14.

.6 Add new sentence to end of paragraph 2.2.11 “The Consultant’s obligation to make findings on a large claim or large number of claims is subject to the terms and conditions of the Owner/Consultant agreement.”

.7 Delete from paragraph 2.2.15 the words “Change Directives” and "and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE"

1.3 GC 2.3 REVIEW AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK .1 Delete paragraph 2.3.6. in its entirety. .2 Delete paragraph 2.3.7. in its entirety.

1.4 GC 2.4 DEFECTIVE WORK .1 Add new subparagraphs 2.4.1.1 and 2.4.1.2:

.1 2.4.1.1 The Contractor shall rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the

Consultant, all defective work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically identified by the Consultant.

.2 2.4.1.2 The Contractor shall prioritize the correction of any defective work which, in the sole discretion of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.

1.5 GC 3.1 CONTROL OF THE WORK .1 Add the word “schedules” after the word “techniques” in paragraph 3.1.2. .2 Add new paragraph 3.1.3:

.1 3.1.3 Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction

activities, the Contractor shall verify, at the Place of the Work, all relevant measurements and levels necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and shall further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or exact locations are not apparent, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Consultant in writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any part of the affected work.

1.6 GC 3.2. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER AND OTHER CONTRACTORS .1 Delete from paragraph 3.2.5 the words "and GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE"

1.7 GC 3.4 DOCUMENT REVIEW .1 Delete paragraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.4.1:

.1 3.4.1 The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and shall report promptly to

the Consultant any error, inconsistency or omission the Contractor may discover. Such review by the Contractor shall comply with the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1 of the Contract. Except for its obligation to make such review and report the result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

1.8 GC 3.6 SUPERVISION .1 Delete paragraph 3.6.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.6.1:

.1 3.6.1 Employ a competent superintendent to provide supervision and necessary

assistants who shall be in attendance at the Work site at all times while work is being performed. .1 The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Consultant and shall not be changed

except for good reasons and only then after consultation with, and agreement by, the Consultant.

.2 The superintendent shall represent the Contractor at the Work site and directions given to him by the Consultant shall beheld to have been given to the Contractor.

.3 Superintendent shall be deemed not satisfactory and changes or additions to superintendent may be demanded when: .1 Control, organization and co-ordination of the Work is not satisfactory, or .2 The quality of the Work does not meet the requirements of the Contract

Documents, or .3 The directions given in accordance with the Contract Documents are not followed,

or .4 The progress of the Work is behind the agreed schedule.

.4 Superintendent to co-ordinate work of all trades and ensure prompt and continuous prosecution of work.

1.9 GC 3.7 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS .1 Delete the words “through the Consultant” in paragraph 3.7.6.

1.10 GC 3.8 LABOUR AND PRODUCTS .1 Add new paragraph 3.8.4:

.1 3.8.4 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their

protection (including Products supplied by the Owner and other contractors to be installed under the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination to the Products or other persons or property and in locations at the Place of the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner shall provide all relevant information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner.

1.11 GC 3.10 SHOP DRAWINGS .1 Add the words “AND OTHER SUBMITTALS” to the Title after SHOP DRAWINGS. .2 Add “and Submittals after the words “Shop Drawings in paragraphs 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.10.4, 3.10.7, 3.10.8,

3.10.8.2, 3.10.9, 3.10.10, 3.10.11, and 3.10.12. .3 Delete 3.10.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.10.3

.1 3.10.3 The Contractor shall prepare a schedule of the dates for provision, review and

return of Shop Drawings and Submittals and submit it to the Consultant for review. .4 Delete the last sentence in paragraph 3.10.9 .5 Delete the words “so as to cause no delay in the performance of the Work” in paragraph 3.10.12.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

1.12 GC 3.14 PERFORMANCE BY CONTRACTOR .1 Add new General Condition 3.14 as follows:

.1 3.14.1 In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor shall

exercise a standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an experienced and prudent contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor’s obligations, duties and responsibilities shall be interpreted in accordance with this standard. The Contractor shall exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in respect of any Products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.

.2 3.14.2 The Contractor further represents, covenants and warrants to the Owner that:

.1 The personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced;

.2 It has a sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace its designated supervisor and project manager, subject to the Owner’s approval, in the event of death, incapacity, removal or resignation.

1.13 GC 4.1 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Delete paragraph 4.1.4 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.4:

.1 4.1.4 Where the actual cost of the Work under any cash allowance exceeds the

amount of the allowance, any unexpended amounts from other cash allowances shall be reallocated, at the Consultant’s direction, to cover the shortfall, and, in that case, there shall be no additional amount added to the Contract Price for overhead and profit. Only where the actual cost of the Work under all cash allowances exceeds the total amount of all cash allowances shall the Contractor be compensated for the excess incurred and substantiated, plus an amount for overhead and profit on the excess only, as set out in the Contract Documents.

.2 Delete paragraph 4.1.5 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.5:

.1 4.1.5 The net amount of any unexpended cash allowances, after providing for any

reallocations as contemplated in paragraph 4.1.4, shall be deducted from the Contract Price by Change Order without any adjustment for the Contractor's overhead and profit on such amount.

.3 Delete paragraph 4.1.7 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.7.

.1 4.1.7. The Contractor shall prepare a schedule that shows when the Owner must

authorize ordering of items called for under cash allowances to avoid delaying the progress of the work.

.4 Add new paragraph 4.1.8:

.1 4.1.8 The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, for competitive

bids for portions of the Work, to be paid for from cash allowances.


Page 5


217102

April 2018

1.14 GC 5.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT .1 Revise Paragraph 5.2.7 as follows:

.1 "... not yet incorporated into the Work, provided such Products are Project specific and cannot

readily be used elsewhere, may be considered for payment on an individual basis, and shall be supported by such evidence ..."

.2 Add the following new paragraphs:

.1 5.2.8 The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant with every application for payment, the following documentation in accordance with the Construction Lien Act

.1 A Statutory Declaration certifying that all accounts of all Subcontractors and suppliers relative to the project have been paid in full, less only the part of holdback monies due to them. The form of Statutory Declaration CCDC Document 9A shall be used. The required document shall be a printed electronic version bearing the required CCDC copyright seal. Digital copies and/or photocopies of the CCDC document, whether bearing the copyright seal or not, will be rejected.

.2 A Clearance Certificate from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board (WSIB) stating that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the Workers' Compensation Act and is in good standing as of the date of the Certificate.

.2 5.2.9 Application for release of holdback as permitted under the Construction Lien Act

(Ont.) 1990 shall be accompanied by Workplace Safety Insurance Board (WSIB) clearance and a statutory declaration in the form CCDC Document 9A, printed electronic version with CCDC copyright seal, and such additional supporting documents as the Consultant may reasonably require.

1.15 GC 5.3 PROGRESS PAYMENT .1 Delete subparagraph 5.3.1.1 in its entirety.

1.16 GC 5.6 PROGRESSIVE RELEASE OF HOLDBACK .1 Delete paragraphs 5.6.1., 5.6.2 and 5.6.3 entirely.

1.17 GC 6.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK .1 Add to the end of 6.2.1:

.1 "..., and if no adjustment in Contract Time is proposed by the Contractor, then it shall be deemed

that the change in the Work will have no impact on the Contract Time."

.2 Add the following new paragraphs 6.2.3 through 6.2.9:

.1 6.2.3 In presenting a method of cost adjustment or amount of adjustment for the Contract Price proposed or required for a change in the Work, the Contractor shall include a detailed estimate of the Contractor's and Subcontractor's costs, including Products and labour, shown in hours per category of worker, and allowance for overhead costs and profit. The following maximum percentages shall be applied to the net actual increased cost required to be borne by the Contractor or Subcontractor, as complete compensation for overhead costs and profit:


Page 6


217102

April 2018

.1 Contractor on work of Subcontractors 10%.

.2 Contractor on his own work 10%.

.3 Subcontractors on their own work 10%. .2 These percentage allowances for overhead costs and profit are deemed to include:

.1 the Contractor's head office and administration expenses, associated travelling/accommodation/meal costs, financing costs including holdback, bonding and insurance costs;

.2 all supervision, coordination, administration, margin and risk of undertaking within stipulated amount;

.3 the salaries of superintendents, engineers, timekeepers, accountants, clerks, watch persons and all other Site supervision staff above foreperson level employed directly on the Work;

.4 the Contractor’s mark-up and profit;

.5 use of temporary offices, sheds and other general temporary Site support facilities and all utilities used therein;

.3 These percentage allowances also include for miscellaneous additional costs related to: .1 licences and permits, except when these are special for a particular item of Work; .2 purchase of rental material, plant and equipment; .3 purchase of small tools and supplies; .4 safety and protection measures; and .5 engineering, as-built drawings and commissioning.

.4 For a given change in the Work, these percentage allowances apply to the net cost of the change after consideration of both increases and decreases in the cost of the Work.

.2 6.2.4 In presenting a method of adjustment of the Contract Time for a proposed or

required change in the Work, the Contractor will include detailed scheduling information to substantiate the impact of the change on the critical path of the project, being the linear sequence of dependent activities to complete the project in the least possible time. If the work resulting from the change can be completed concurrent with originally planned activities so as not to delay the overall project, no change in contract time will apply.

.3 6.2.5 The preparation of proposed adjustments to Contract Price and Contract Time for

proposed or required changes in the Work is a requirement of the Contract and fees for preparing such quotations will not constitute a change in Contract Price, whether or not the change proceeds.

.4 6.2.6 If the Consultant determines it necessary for the proper performance of the Work

or to avoid delays, that the work of change should proceed before an adjustment in Contract Price and/or Contract Time can be determined or agreed upon, the Consultant may issue instructions to proceed with the work of the change prior to the issuance of a Change Order. The Contractor shall act immediately according to such instructions; it being understood that doing so will not jeopardize any claim the Contractor may have related to the change in the Work. The Contractor and the Consultant will expedite valuation and agreement between the parties on the corresponding change in Contract Price and change in Contract Time.


Page 7


217102

April 2018

.5 6.2.7 If, after reasonable efforts by the Parties and the Consultant, the method of adjustment or the amount of adjustment for the Contract Price or Contract Time cannot be agreed upon, then the Consultant in the first instance will determine the method of valuation, measurement, the change in Contract Price and Contract Time subject to final determination in the manner set out in Part 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION. In this case the Consultant will, with consent of the Owner, issue a Change Order establishing the method of valuation and if by stipulated sum his valuation of the change in Contract Price and Contract Time, and such Change Order constitutes the finding of the Consultant in accordance with GC 2.2, sentence 2.2.6 and the Contractor will proceed with the change in the Work in accordance with GC 8.1, sentence 8.1.3. Parties wishing to further dispute the Change Order must submit a notice in writing of dispute in accordance Part 8 DISPUTE RESOLUTION, within the time limitations contained therein. Failure to provide notice in writing of dispute within the required time limitations with regard to a Change Order constitutes acceptance of the terms of the Change Order, whether the Change Order is signed by the party or not, and the Contract is deemed to have been changed in accordance with the Change Order.

.6 6.2.8 The Contractor will keep accurate records of quantities, labour time and cost of

work of any disputed Change Order.

.7 6.2.9 In the case of a disputed Change Order, pending final determination of associated adjustment in Contract Price and Contract Time, the Contractor will include the value of the disputed Change Order on applications for payment without prejudice to the dispute, and the Consultant will certify the value of the work performed in accordance with the Change Order, and include the amount with regular certificates for payment.

1.18 GC 6.3 CHANGE DIRECTIVE .1 Delete GC 6.3 Change Directive in its entirety.

1.19 GC 6.4 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS .1 Add new subparagraph 6.4.5:

.1 6.4.5 The Contractor confirms that, prior to bidding the Project, it carefully investigated

the Place of the Work and applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1, given the amount of time provided between the issue of the bid documents and the actual closing of bids, the degree of access provided to the Contractor prior to submission of bid, and the sufficiency and completeness of the information provided by the Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to compensation or to an extension of the Contract Time for conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by the Contractor by such careful investigation undertaken prior to the submission of the bid.

.2 Delete from paragraph 6.4.2 the words "or GC 6.3 - CHANGE DIRECTIVE"

1.20 GC 6.5 DELAYS .1 Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.1, and substitute the following words:

.1 “, but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages.”


Page 8


217102

April 2018

.2 Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.2, and substitute the following words:

.1 “, but excluding any consequential, indirect or special damages.”

.3 Add new subparagraph 6.5.6.

.1 6.5.6 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an act or omission

of the Contractor or anyone employed or engaged by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by any cause within the Contractor’s control, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for all reasonable costs incurred by the Owner as the result of such delay, including all services required by the Owner from the Consultant as a result of such delay by the Contractor and, in particular, the cost of the Consultant’s services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of the Work stated in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the Work achieved by the Contractor.

1.21 GC 6.6 CLAIMS FOR A CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE .1 Delete paragraph 6.6.5. in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 6.6.5.

.1 6.6.5 The Consultant’s findings, with respect to a claim made by either party will be

given by Notice in Writing by the Consultant to both parties within reasonable time after receipt of the claim information noted in paragraph 6.6.3.

.2 Add new paragraph 6.6.7

.1 6.6.7 The Owner may make claims arising out of the costs incurred for additional

services provided by the Consultant resulting from the Contractor’s failure to reasonably perform the Work in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract, including the Contractor’s issuance of unnecessary Requests for Information. The Consultant will notify the Owner and Contractor where it has been determined that additional services will be required or have been provided in order not to cause a delay. The Owner shall make claims based on the Consultant’s invoices.

1.22 GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION .1 Revise the heading, “GC 8.2 NEGOTIATION, MEDIATION AND ARBITRATION” to read, “GC 8.2

NEGOTIATION AND MEDIATION”. .2 Delete paragraphs 8.2.6, 8.2.7, and 8.2.8 in their entirety.

1.23 GC 9.1 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY .1 Delete subparagraph 9.1.1.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 9.1.1.1:

.1 9.1.1.1 errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have discovered

applying the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1;


Page 9


217102

April 2018

.2 Delete paragraph 9.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following new paragraph 9.1.2:

.1 9.1.2 Before commencing any Work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all underground utilities and structures indicated in or reasonably determinable from the Contract Documents, or that are reasonably determinable from an inspection of the Place of the Work exercising the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1.

.2

1.24 GC 9.2 TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES .1 Add to paragraph 9.2.6 after the word "responsible”, the following new words:

.1 "or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and

which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,"

.2 Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Contractor” in subparagraph 9.2.7.4.

.3 Add to paragraph 9.2.8 after the word "responsible”, the following new words:

.1 "or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and

which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others, "

.4 Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Owner” in subparagraph 9.2.8.4.

1.25 GC 9.5 MOULD .1 Add “and the Consultant” after “Owner” in subparagraph 9.5.2.4.

.2 Add “and the Consultant” after “Contractor” in subparagraph 9.5.3.4.

1.26 GC 10.2 LAWS, NOTICES, PERMITS, AND FEES .1 Replace GC 10.2.2 with:

.1 "The Contractor shall obtain and pay for the building permit. The Owner shall provide and pay

for all development approvals, permanent easements and rights of servitude and all other necessary approvals and permits except for the permits and fees referred to in paragraph 10.2.3. or for which the Contract Documents specify as the responsibility of the Contractor."

.2 Delete from the first line of paragraph 10.2.5 the word, "The" and substitute the words:

.1 "Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the".


Page 10


217102

April 2018

1.27 GC11.1 INSURANCE .1 Delete entirety of general condition and CCDC 41 and replace with the following:

11.1 Without restricting the generality of GC 12 - INDEMNIFICATION, the Contractor shall

provide, maintain, and pay for the insurance coverages specified in GC 11.1 - INSURANCE. Unless otherwise stipulated, the duration of each insurance policy shall be from the date of commencement of the Work until the expiration of the warranty periods set out in the Contract Documents. Prior to commencement of the Work and upon the placement, renewal, amendment, or extension of all or any part of the insurance, the Contractor shall promptly provide the Owner with confirmation of coverage and, if required, a certified true copy of the policies certified by an authorized representative of the insurer together with copies of any amending endorsements.

General Liability Insurance General liability insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor, with the Owner and the Consultant

named as additional insureds, with limits of not less than $5,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death, and damage to property, including loss of use thereof, for itself and each of its employees, Subcontractors and/or agents. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance required by IBC Form 2100, or its equivalent replacement, provided that IBC Form 2100 shall contain the latest edition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. To achieve the desired limit, umbrella, or excess liability insurance may be used. All liability coverage shall be maintained for completed operations hazards from the date of Substantial Performance of the Work, as set out in the certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, on an ongoing basis for a period of 6 years following Substantial Performance of the Work. Where the Contractor maintains a single, blanket policy, the addition of the Owner and the Consultant is limited to liability arising out of the Project and all operations necessary or incidental thereto. The policy shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of any cancellation and of change or amendment restricting coverage.

Automobile Liability Insurance Automobile liability insurance in respect of licensed vehicles shall limits of not less than $2,000,000.00

inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death and damage to property, covering all licensed vehicles owned or leased by the Contractor, and endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of any cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage. Where the policy has been issued pursuant to a government-operated automobile insurance system, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with confirmation of automobile insurance coverage for all automobiles registered in the name of the Contractor.


Page 11


217102

April 2018

Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance Where determined necessary by the Contractor, acting reasonably, aircraft and watercraft liability

insurance will be obtained in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 11.1.3. Aircraft and watercraft liability insurance with respect to owned or non-owed aircraft and watercraft if used directly or indirectly in the performance of the Work, including use of additional premises, shall be subject to limits of not less than $2,000,000.00 inclusive per occurrence for bodily injury, death and damage to property, including loss of use thereof and limits of not less than $2,000,000.00 for aircraft passenger hazard. Such insurance shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage.

Builders Risk and Boiler and Machinery Insurance (1) Builder's Risk property insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor with the Owner and the

Consultant named as additional insureds. The policy shall insure against all risks of direct physical loss or damage to the property insured which shall include all property included in the Work, whether owned by the Contractor or the owner or owned by others, so long as the property forms part of the Work. The property insured also includes all materials and supplies necessary to complete the work, whether installed in the work temporarily or permanently, in storage on the project site, or in transit to the project site, as well as temporary buildings, scaffolding, falsework forms, hoardings, excavation, site preparation and similar work.

Builders Risk insurance shall have limits of not less than the sum of 1.5 times Contract Price and the

full value, as stated in the Contract, of Products and design services that are specified to be provided by the Owner for incorporation into the Work, with a deductible not exceeding $5,000. The insurance coverage shall not be less than the insurance provided by IBC Forms 4042 and 4047 (excluding flood and earthquake) or their equivalent replacement.

The insurance shall include the foregoing and, otherwise, shall not be less than the insurance required

by IBC Form 4042 or its equivalent replacement provided that the IBC Form 4042 shall include the latest addition of the relevant CCDC endorsement form. The coverage shall be based on a completed value form and shall be maintained continuously from the date of commencement of the Work until the earliest of:

(a) 10 calendar days after the date of Substantial Performance of the Work; (b) on the commencement of use or occupancy of any part or section of the Work unless such use or

occupancy is for construction purposes, habitational, office, banking, convenience store under 465 square metres in area, or parking purposes, or for the installation, testing and commissioning of equipment forming part of the Work;

(c) when left unattended for more than 30 consecutive calendar days or when construction activity has ceased for more than 30 consecutive calendar days.

(2) Boiler and machinery insurance shall be in the name of the Contractor, with the Owner and the

Consultant named as additional insureds, for not less than the replacement value of the boilers, pressure vessels and other insurable objects forming part of the Work. The insurance provided shall not be less than the insurance provided by the “Comprehensive Boiler and Machinery Form” and shall be maintained continuously from commencement of use or operation of the property insured and until 10 days after the date of the final certificate for payment.


Page 12


217102

April 2018

(3) The policies shall allow for partial or total use or occupancy of the Work. (4) The policies shall provide that, in the case of a loss or damage, payment shall be made to the

Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss or damage payment with the insurers. When the extent of the loss or damage is determined, the Contractor shall proceed to restore the Work. Loss or damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except that the Contractor shall be entitled to such reasonable extension of the Contract Time, relative to the extent of the loss or damage, as determined by the Owner, in its sole discretion.

(5) The Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the Owner, in addition to the amount due under

the Contract, the amount at which the Owner's interest in restoration of the Work has been appraised, such amount to be paid as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT. In addition, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive from the payments made by the insurer the amount of the Contractor's interest in the restoration of the Work.

(6) In the case of loss or damage to the Work arising from the work of other contractors, or the

Owner's own forces, the Owner, in accordance with the Owner's obligations under paragraph 3.2.2.4 of GC 3.2 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OTHER CONTRACTORS, shall pay the Contractor the cost of restoring the Work as the restoration of the Work proceeds and as provided in GC 5.2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT and GC 5.3 - PROGRESS PAYMENT.

Contractors' Equipment Insurance "All risks " contractors' equipment insurance covering construction machinery and equipment used by

the Contractor for the performance of the Work, excluding boiler insurance, shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner and shall not allow subrogation claims by the insurer against the Owner. The policies shall be endorsed to provide the Owner with not less than 30 days notice, in writing, in advance of cancellation, change or amendment restricting coverage. Subject to satisfactory proof of financial capability by the Contractor for self-insurance of his equipment, the Owner agrees to waive the equipment insurance requirement.

11.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for deductible amounts under the policies except

where such amounts may be excluded from the Contractor's responsibility by the terms of GC 9.1 - PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY and GC 9.2 - DAMAGES AND MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY.

11.1.3 Where the full insurable value of the Work is substantially less than the Contract Price, the

Owner may reduce the amount of insurance required to waive the course of construction insurance requirement.

11.1.4 If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain insurance as required by the Contract

Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to provide and maintain such insurance and provide evidence of same to the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay the costs thereof to the Owner on demand, or the Owner may deduct the amount that is due or may become due to the Contractor.

11.1.5 All required insurance policies shall be with insurers licensed to underwrite insurance in

the jurisdiction of the Place of the Work.”


Page 13


217102

April 2018

1.28 GC 11.2 - CONTRACT SECURITY .1 Add new Paragraph 11.2.3 as follows:

.1 11.2.3 The Contractor shall provide a Performance Bond in the name of the Owner for Fifty Percent (50%) of the Contract Price, to assure the faithful performance of the Contract, including corrections to the Work required under GC 12.3 - Warranty; on Performance Bond Form, CCDC 221.

.2 Add new Paragraph 11.2.4 as follows: .1 11.2.4 The Contractor shall also provide a Labour and Material Payment Bond in the

name of the Owner for Fifty Percent (50%) of the Contract Price, to assume faithful payment of monies to parties in contract with the Contract; on Labour and Material Payment Bond Form, CCDC 222.

1.29 GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION .1 Add “and the Consultant” after the words “hold harmless the other” in paragraph 12.1.1.

1.30 GC 12.3 WARRANTY .1 Delete from the first line of paragraph 12.3.2 the word, "The" and substitute the words:

.1 "Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the...".

END OF SECTION

01 00 01.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - NNDSB

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS .1 Instructions to Bidders, Division 00, Section 00 21 12. .2 Tender Form , Division 00, Section 00 41 10. .3 Canadian Construction Document (CCDC 2) 2008, Stipulated Price Contract, Division 00, Section 00 52

13. .4 Supplementary Definitions, Division 00, Section 00 56 13. .5 Supplementary Articles of Agreement, Division 00, Section 00 73 01. .6 Supplementary General Conditions, Division 00, Section 00 73 02.

1.2 CONTRACT SECURITY .1 Contractor shall acquire at their expense the following bonds:

.1 50% Performance Bond

.2 50% Labour and Materials Bond .2 Submit required Bonds prior to commencing work on site. .3 Bonds shall be issued by a surety company acceptable to the Consultant and kept in force until

expiration of the Contract.

1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES .1 Refer to GC4.1. .2 All of the following allowances are intended to cover the cost of the items listed, including provincial

sales taxes, delivery, duty, levies, etc. but do not include the Harmonized Sales Tax. .3 Include the sum of $20,000 as a general contingency allowance to be expended as later directed by the

Consultant. Refer to GC4.2. .4 Include the sum of $5,000 for third party geotechnical testing and inspection services related to

granular materials, compaction monitoring, concrete and asphalt pavement. .5 Include the sum of $15,000 for asbestos abatement and for associated third party testing and

inspection services related to asbestos abatement. .6 Include the sum of $10,000 as a mechanical / electrical general contingency allowance to be expended

as later directed by the Consultant.

1.4 APPROVALS AND PERMITS .1 The Work is subject to the approval, inspection, by-laws and regulations of all municipal, provincial,

federal and other authorities having jurisdiction. .2 The Contractor shall obtain and pay the fees for all approvals and permits required for the Work. Refer

to Supplementary General Conditions - Section 00 73 02, GC 10.2.2. .3 Where the Ontario Building Code is referenced, it shall mean the consolidated version of the 2012

Ontario Building Code Act containing the Building Code Act and Ontario Regulation 332/12 (O.Reg. 332/12).

1.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT .1 Payments on this Contract to be made by the Owner in accordance with Supplementary General GC -

5.2 - Application for Progress Payment. .2 Submit breakdown of contract price in detail as directed by Consultant and aggregating the total

contract amount.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.3 Submit progress claim showing breakdown of cost of work done to date in accordance with approved cost breakdown format.

.4 Submit breakdown of contract price in detail as directed by Consultant and aggregating contract price. The breakdown shall include a separate line item with a value of $1,000.00 as a deposit for borrowed keys. This line item will not be paid until Total Completion of the project has been achieved and the Owner’s Designee (Steve Sutton) has confirmed that all borrowed keys have been returned. If keys are not returned within 30 days after Total Completion, the Contractor forfeits the deposit to the Owner who will utilize these funds for re-keying of the building.

.5 Holdback procedure shall be in accordance with Construction Lien Act R.S.O. 1990.

.6 Payment will be made by the Owner to the Contractor by electronic fund transfer (EFT/direct deposit) method only.

1.6 SCHEDULES .1 Submit Construction Progress Schedule within 10 days after award of Contract. .2 Submit 4 copies, 3 copies to be retained by Consultant. .3 Consultant will review schedule and return reviewed copy within 10 days after receipt. .4 Interim reviews of work progress based on work schedule will be conducted as decided by Consultant

and schedule updated by Contractor in conjunction with and to approval of Consultant.

1.7 SUBMITTALS .1 Administrative:

.1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in the Work. Allow two weeks for Consultant's review.

.2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.

.3 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

.4 Verify that field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated. .2 Shop Drawings and Product Data:

.1 Refer to GC 3.10.

.2 'Shop Drawings' means drawings, diagrams, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of the Work.

.3 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work.

.4 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price.

.5 Make changes in shop drawings as Consultant may require.

.6 Submit four (4) sets of shop drawings prints for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as Consultant may reasonably request.

.7 Submit 4 copies of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as Consultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.

.3 Samples: .1 Submit for review, samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. .2 Deliver samples prepaid to Consultant's business address, clearly and permanently marked with

Contractor's name, project, and specification section.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

1.8 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED BEFORE CONSTRUCTION START .1 Prior to construction start, submit the following:

.1 An executed construction contract.

.2 Proof of liability and fire insurance, with provisions preventing unilateral cancellation.

.3 Specified bonds.

.4 Proof that all building permits have been issued.

.5 Breakdown of contract price.

.6 Schedules required.

.7 Certificate of good standing from the Worker's Safety Insurance Board (WSIB).

.8 “Notice of Project " Application to the Ministry of Labour.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL .1 Refer to GC2.3. .2 Provide a system of quality control to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein are

attained. .3 Bring to the attention of the Consultant any defects in work or departures from the Contract

Documents which may occur during construction. The Consultant will decide upon corrective actions and state his recommendations in writing.

.4 The Consultant's general review during construction and inspection and testing by dependent inspection and testing agencies reporting to the Architect are both undertaken to inform the Owner of the Contractor's performance and shall in no way augment the Contractor's quality control or relieve him of contractual responsibility.

1.10 PROTECTION AND SAFETY .1 Comply with requirements of all Acts and Regulations with respect to health and safety including

Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1980 Chapter 321 (as amended) and Regulations for Construction Projects (as amended) made thereunder; and Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Regulation, Ontario Regulation 644/88 including the following: .1 Before commencement of Work, and throughout Contract, maintain on Site, and readily

accessible to all those who may be exposed to hazardous materials, a list of all hazardous materials proposed for use on Site or Workplace together with current Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.2 Ensure hazardous materials used and/or supplied on Site are labelled in accordance with WHMIS requirements.

.3 Provide detailed written procedures for safe handling, storage and use of such hazardous materials including special precautions, safe clean-up and disposal procedures. Conform to Environmental Protection Act for disposal requirements.

.4 Ensure that those who handle, and/or are exposed to, hazardous materials are fully instructed and trained in accordance with WHMIS requirements.

.2 Work required to be undertaken near occupied spaces must be coordinated with the Consultant and, the Owner.

.3 Contractor must provide for safe use of the facilities by the staff throughout the duration of the contract, including the provision of protective barriers and hoarding to separate the work area from occupied areas and to protect public access and egress from the building and on exterior walkways around building.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

.4 Contractor’s Health and Safety Policy .1 Contractor shall provide written confirmation that all workers employed by the Contractor have

obtained health and safety training including WHMIS training specified under 10.0-1.4. .2 Contractor shall retain on site a copy of its health and safety manual identified in Section 00 21

12 Instructions to Bidders. Make readily available to all employees, sub-trades and Owner/Consultant.

.3 Comply with the Owner’s “Hot Work " protocols and obtain "Hot Work Permits" per the Owner’s guidelines and sample permit appended to this Section.

1.11 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS .1 Installation/Removal

.1 Provide construction facilities and temporary controls in order to execute the work expeditiously.

.2 Remove from site all such work after use. .2 Guard Rails and Barricades

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard railings and barricades around openings as required by governing authorities.

.3 Weather Enclosures .1 Provide weathertight closures to unfinished openings in a manner to maintain building security.

.4 Site Storage/Loading .1 Refer to GC3.11. .2 Confine the Work and the operations of employees so as to not unreasonably encumber the

premises with products. .3 Do not load or permit to be loaded any part of the Work with a weight or force that will

endanger the Work. .4 Restore damaged site finishes (e.g. paving, sodding, landscaping) caused by Work of this

contract. .5 Project Cleanliness

.1 Maintain the Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris.

.2 Remove waste material and debris from site and deposit in waste container at end of each working day. Remove waste from container as required.

.3 Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work. Maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

.6 Power, Water, Light and Heat .1 The Owner will provide and pay for a potable water supply for use by the Contractor. .2 The Owner will provide and pay for electrical power supply for normal hand tools, temporary

lighting and similar equipment for use by the Contractor. .3 The Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary lighting required to complete the Work. .4 The Contractor shall provide and pay temporary heating equipment required in addition to the

building’s primary heat source as required to complete the Work. .7 Toilet Facilities

.1 The Contractor may use the existing toilet facilities, provided they are maintained in a clean condition during their use.


Page 5


217102

April 2018

1.12 SUPERINTENDENT .1 Employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Work

site at all times while work is being performed. .2 The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Consultant and shall not be changed except for good

reasons and only then after consultation with, and agreement by, the Consultant. .3 The superintendent shall represent the Contractor at the Work site and directions given to him by the

Consultant shall beheld to have been given to the Contractor. .4 Superintendent shall be deemed not satisfactory and changes or additions to superintendent may be

demanded when: .1 Control, organization and co-ordination of the Work is not satisfactory, or .2 The quality of the Work does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, or .3 The directions given in accordance with the Contract Documents are not followed, or .4 The progress of the Work is behind the agreed schedule.

.5 Superintendent to co-ordinate work of all trades and ensure prompt and continuous prosecution of work.

1.13 PROJECT COORDINATION .1 Coordinate progress of the Work, progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, and

construction facilities. .2 Coordinate work, including work of subtrades. Where conflicts between requirements of different

Sections occur, notify Consultant for direction. .3 Check and verify dimensions, construction and equipment locations before setting out the work and

report any discrepancies to the Consultant. The Contractor shall be held responsible for errors resulting from his failure to comply with this requirement.

1.14 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED .1 Maintain at job site, one copy each of following:

.1 Contract drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Reviewed shop drawings.

.5 Site Instructions.

.6 Notices of Change.

.7 Change orders.

.8 Other modifications to Contract.

.9 Field test reports.

.10 Copy of approved work schedule.

.11 Manufacturer's installation and application instructions.

1.15 PROJECT MEETINGS .1 Prior to work commencing, the Consultant will schedule and administer a pre-construction meeting to

be attended by the Contractor, major sub-contractors, site supervisor, and Owner’s Designee(s). Agenda to include the following: .1 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work. .2 Schedule of Work, progress scheduling. .3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips.


Page 6


217102

April 2018

.4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences.

.5 Site security.

.6 Contemplated change notices, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements.

.7 Review of pre-construction documentation. .2 The Consultant may schedule additional meetings if project conditions warrant. .3 Consultant will record minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions. .4 Consultant will reproduce and distribute copies of minutes to meeting participants and affected parties

not in attendance.

1.16 SETTING OUT OF WORK .1 Assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of work to locations, lines and elevations

indicated. .2 Provide devices needed to lay out and construct work. .3 Supply such devices as straight edges and templates required to facilitate Consultant's review of work. .4 Supply stakes and other survey markers required for laying out work. .5 Protect existing survey markers.

1.17 ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS .1 Consultant may furnish additional drawings to assist proper execution of work. These drawings will be

issued for clarification only. Such drawings shall have same meaning and intent as if they were included with plans referred to in Contract documents.

1.18 SITE REVIEW .1 Refer to GC2.2 and 2.3. .2 No review by the Consultant shall relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract or

shall be interpreted as being an acceptance of defective or improper work or material, which must in every case be removed and replaced properly or otherwise rectified in a satisfactory manner whenever discovered at any time.

1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING .1 Approvals.

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of any element of Project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of Owner or separate Contractor.

.2 Inspection .1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during

cutting and patching. .2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. .3 Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.3 Execution .1 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete the Work. .2 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. .3 Perform work to avoid damage to other work.


Page 7


217102

April 2018

.4 Prepare proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.5 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.

.6 Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed.

.7 Restore work with new products in accordance with Contract Documents.

.8 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes; for continuous surfaces refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

1.20 COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION SCHEDULE .1 Time is of the essence in this contract. .2 Commence preparations for the Work immediately. .3 Work will be required to be undertaken and completed during the summer break which

commences on July 3rd, 2018. Attain Substantial Completion of the Work no later than August 24th, 2018. Undertaking of the work while classes are in session will not be permitted.

.4 Once the Work has commenced, work continuously towards completion. Periods of inactivity on site will not be permitted without prior consent of the Owner.

1.21 OPERATING / MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND RECORD DRAWINGS .1 Submit to the Consultant, 1 (one) paper copy and 1 (one) digital copy (on portable thumb drive) of

operating and maintenance manuals and as-built drawings. .2 Manuals to contain operational information on equipment, cleaning and lubrication schedules, filters,

overhaul and adjustment schedules and similar maintenance information. Instructions in this manual shall be in simple language so as to guide the Owner in the proper operation maintenance of building components.

.3 Bind contents in a three-ring, hard covered, plastic jacketed binder. Organize contents into applicable categories of work, parallel to specification Sections.

.4 In addition to information specified, include the following: .1 Title sheet, labeled "Operating and Maintenance instructions", containing project name and

date. .2 List of names, addresses and phone number of subcontractors and suppliers who can effect

repair of maintenance on equipment. .3 List of contents. .4 Final shop drawings and product data of equipment. .5 Full description of building systems and operation. .6 Warranties

.5 Project Record Drawings: .1 After award of Contract the Consultant will provide a set of drawings for the purpose of

maintaining record drawings. Accurately and neatly record deviations from Contract Documents caused by site conditions and changes ordered by the Consultant. Provide 1 (one) paper copy of final project record drawings.

.2 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal work until required information is recorded.

.3 Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Measure depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. .2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.


Page 8


217102

April 2018

.3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

.4 Field changes of dimension and detail.

.5 Changes made by Change Orders and Site Instructions.

.6 Details not on original Contract Drawings.

1.22 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .1 Final Cleaning

.1 Refer to GC 3.14.

.2 Prior to final acceptance, review final cleaning with Owner representative and Architect.

.3 When the Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, temporary facilities, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.4 Remove waste materials and debris from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Consultant. Do not burn waste materials on site, unless approved by Consultant.

.5 Remove dirt and other disfigurations from exterior surfaces. .2 Documents

.1 Collect reviewed submittals and assemble documents executed by Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

.2 Submit material two weeks minimum prior to Application for Substantial Performance.

.3 Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Price, previous payments, and monies remaining due.

.4 Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Price not previously made.

.3 Inspection/Takeover Procedures .1 Prior to application for certificate of Substantial Performance, carefully inspect the Work and

ensure it is complete, that major and minor construction deficiencies are complete, defects are corrected and building is clean and in condition for occupancy. Notify Consultant in writing, of satisfactory completion of the Work and request an inspection.

.2 During Consultant inspection, a list of deficiencies and defects will be tabulated. Correct same.

.3 When Consultant considers deficiencies and defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been performed, make application for Certificate of Substantial Performance.

.4 A list of deficiencies still outstanding will be established. If the contract has been Substantially Performed in accordance with the legal requirements of the Construction Lien Act, all required submittals and occupancy certificates have been received, and the provisions of the required completion schedule have been met, a Certificate of Substantial Performance will be issued.

.5 After Certificate of Substantial Performance is issued, arrange and pay for publication of Substantial Performance in acceptable trade publication. Forward proof of publication to Consultant.

.6 Within two weeks after Certificate of Substantial Performance is issued, submit schedule for completion of deficiencies and warranties, and guarantees fully executed and notarized.


Page 9


217102

April 2018

.4 Required Documentation for Project Takeover: The following are required at project takeover (or prior thereto as specified elsewhere): .1 Consultant's certificates. .2 Warranties .3 List of subtrades who will handle warranty work under the terms of the guarantee. .4 Maintenance materials specified. .5 Maintenance manuals and project record drawings.

END OF SECTION

Hot Work Permit Page 1

A Health and Safety Guideline for Your Workplace

INTRODUCTION: The Near North District School Board must protect against fire created by construction or open flame work. The use of welding, grinding, and abrasive cutting equipment is a cause of many fires and explosions in workplaces across Ontario. Where such work is not the part of day to day operations of the Board, a HOT WORK PERMIT system must be used. OBJECTIVES: The objective of the HOT WORK PERMIT is to ensure that:

Work is authorized by a competent person Potential hazards are identified, isolated, removed, protected or disconnected as

appropriate The operator is trained to perform the work safely Appropriate protective clothing and equipment is used Appropriate warning and fire fighting equipment is on hand

DEFINITIONS: Hot work Any activity that could produce flames, sparks, slag or other hot fragments that

might act as an ignition source to flammable materials in the area. HOT WORK also includes any activity that could generate sufficient smoke or heat to activate a fire alarm detection system. It includes, but is not limited to: brazing, cutting, grinding, torch soldering, pipe thawing, torch applied roofing and welding.

Fire Watch A visual inspection of the surrounding work area for smoldering or flaming

ignitions during and after HOT WORK. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES: Facility and Maintenance Supervisors 1. To ensure that all HOT WORK performed by Contractors, maintenance or custodial staff

within their area of responsibility is conducted in a safe manner.

Hot Work Permit


2. To ensure that contractors, custodial or maintenance staff who are conducting HOT WORK are competent in doing so and use a permit system.

3. To ensure that the above-mentioned Board employees are trained in HOT WORK procedures

and have adequate quantities of permits. 4. Pre-screen contractors prior to work. Ensure they have a HOT WORK permit system and

carry suitable and sufficient liability insurance coverage. 5. To ensure that all HOT WORK performed by contractors within their area of responsibility is

conducted in a safe manner. 6. To ensure that a HOT WORK permit system is being utilized by the contractor. 7. To ensure that contractors who are conducting the HOT WORK is competent in doing so. 8. To maintain a copy of the completed permit on site within the custodian’s office. Used

permits shall be filed and maintained for at least one year after the completion of the work. 9. Persons not involved in the hot work should be removed from the area or otherwise protected

from the activities. Plant Manager 1. Pre-screen contractors prior to work. Ensure they have a HOT WORK permit system and

carry suitable and sufficient liability insurance coverage. Custodial and Maintenance Staff 1. To follow all safety and HOT WORK procedures. 2. When performing HOT WORK, complete the HOT WORK permit. 3. To maintain and file HOT WORK permits in the custodian office at the site where the work

was performed and a copy with the lead custodian at the secondary schools. Contractor: 1. The contractor will verify that all hot work equipment is in proper working order and in a fire

safe condition. 2. Any contractor equipment or material that is to be stored in the facility overnight must be

properly secured in an area designated by the Facility or Maintenance Supervisor. 3. Contractors must provide a copy of and follow all necessary precautions in their hot work

program.


Health and Safety Officer: 1. Will maintain additional hot work permits and provide additional copies upon request. PROCEDURE: 1. Before conducting any HOT WORK, the operator shall determine if there is a safer way of

doing the work without the use of any heat or flame-producing device. 2. Prior to conducting HOT WORK, the operator must contact their direct supervisor indicating

the scope of work and the location where the work is to be performed. 3. The operator must check to see that all aspects of the proposed work meets all safety

measures as indicated on the HOT WORK PERMIT. 4. The operator must complete, sign and post the HOT WORK PERMIT in plain view. These

permits should be posted in designated Hot Work Permit pockets. 5. The operator or designate must conduct a fire watch during the work (lunch and breaks) and

for thirty (30) minutes after the work is completed. The individual who is conducting the fire watch shall have a fire extinguisher readily available and trained in its use.

Fire watch is required when:

a) combustible material in construction or contents is closer than 35 feet to the point of operation

b) combustibles are more than 35 feet away but are easily ignited by sparks c) wall or floor openings within 35 feet expose combustible materials in adjacent areas

including concealed spaces in walls or floors d) combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls,

ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by heat conduction or radiation. 6. The operator must file the HOT WORK PERMIT(S) within the custodian’s office at the

location where the work was performed and a copy with the lead custodian at the secondary school.

7. CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE A COPY OF AND FOLLOW ALL NECESSARY

PRECAUTIONS IN THEIR HOT WORK PROGRAM.

HOT WORK PERMIT

01 30 10 ALTERATION PROCEDURES

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Conform to Ontario Building Code, Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act and all other Standards

and Regulations noted. .2 All work performed and materials used shall be of the same standard of quality as that of the existing

finished building as a minimum. .3 Any welding shall be performed by Welders certified in accordance with CSA W47, and shall conform to

CSA W59.

1.2 SECURITY .1 Make provision to maintain building security in a manner acceptable to the Owner during construction

and after normal working hours.

1.3 ACCESS .1 Contractor's access to the work and storage space shall be as agreed between the Owner and

Contractor.

1.4 SCHEDULING .1 The Contractor shall schedule his work and the sequence of operations in cooperation with the Owner

and Consultant and phasing specified in Section 01 00 01 General Requirements, 1.20 Commencement and Completion Schedule. Work shall proceed in strict accordance with the agreed upon and approved schedule.

.2 Hours of Work: .1 While classes are in session:

.1 Work is not permitted. .2 Summer break (July 3rd to August 24th, 2018)

.1 The facilities will be staffed by custodians performing summer maintenance on a periodic basis throughout the summer but will be otherwise vacant. Hours of work are generally unlimited during the summer break. The Owner will provide the Contractor with keys and security access code as required.

.3 Overtime work, weekend work, etc. is included in the contract and shall be provided as required to meet the completion schedule specified in Section 01 00 01 General Requirements.

.4 The building and site shall remain open throughout the course of construction and allow the Owner's custodial staff to perform routine summer maintenance throughout the duration of the Work. Co-ordinate scheduling of work and sequencing of areas to be used for construction with the Owner before work begins.

.3 Utility and service outages shall be kept to a minimum and will be permitted only with written permission of the Owner. Make outage requests at least 48 hours before date of proposed outage. State in request hours of outage.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Suppress all dust and dirt. Prevent the occurrence of unsanitary conditions, flooding or leaking. .2 Do not allow dirt, debris or discarded materials to accumulate on site. Remove promptly each day.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.3 Obtain written confirmation from the Owner that services to be abandoned, removed or cut have been properly and safely shut off, capped or sealed.

.4 If asbestos or silica type insulation or fireproofing are encountered during alteration work cease work in the specific area at once and notify the Consultant immediately. Await Consultant's written instructions before proceeding.

.5 Take extreme care when removing asbestos or silica board fireproofings. Comply strictly with health and safety regulations. Bag material and dispose of in accordance with regulations. Enforce use of breathing masks during cleaning operations.

1.6 DEMOLITION .1 Cutting, removing and demolition shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is

necessary or to damage adjacent work. .2 Do not let piled material endanger structure or persons at any time or create unsanitary conditions. .3 Where demolition work involves cutting into any part of the building structure, materials or finishes

which are to be extended, added to or joined to new work, the cutting shall be performed by trades whose work is encountered.

.4 Construction, furnishings and articles of a private or historic nature which are encountered during demolition shall be turned over to the Owner, or they shall be disposed of as the Owner directs for the specific item.

.5 Cut out and remove all those assemblies, materials or items indicated as being removed, abandoned or discarded on the drawings and promptly removed from the site if not wanted by Owner.

1.7 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION .1 Extent

.1 Cutting and removal work shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more than is necessary and so as not to damage adjacent work.

.2 Responsibility and Assignment to Trades .1 Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removal, cutting, patching and repair to trades

under his supervision so as to cause the least damage to each type of work encountered, and so as to return the building as much as possible to the appearance of new work.

.2 Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work of the finish trade involved.

.3 Protection .1 Protect remaining finishes, equipment and adjacent work from damage caused by cutting,

moving, removal and patching operations. Protect surfaces which will remain a part of the finished work.

.4 Debris .1 Remove debris promptly from the site each day. Removed material, except that listed or

marked by the Consultant for retention, becomes the property of the Contractor. Load removed material directly on trucks for removal from site. Dispose of removed material legally. Do not burn on site. Do not allow debris to enter sewers.

.2 Do not let piled material endanger structure.

.3 Suppress dust. Prevent the occurrence of unsanitary conditions, dirt or debris on the site and neighbouring property.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

1.8 PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING .1 Skill

.1 Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching the existing quality or workmanship. The quality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified in the Sections of the product and execution Specifications which follow these General Requirements.

.2 Patching .1 In areas where any portion of an existing finished surface is damaged, lifted, stained or

otherwise made or found to be imperfect, patch or replace the imperfect portion of the surface with matching material.

.2 Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction, except where small quantities of finish material which are difficult to match or duplicate are approved for patching or extending purposes by the Consultant.

.3 Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes.

.4 If the imperfect surface was painted or coated, repaint or recoat the patched portion in such a way that uniform colour and texture over the entire surface results.

.5 If the surrounding surface cannot be matched, repaint or recoat the entire surface. .3 Quality

.1 In the Sections of the Specifications which follow these General Requirements, no concerted attempt has been made to describe each of the various existing products that must be used to patch, match, extend or replace existing work. Obtain all such products in time to complete the Work on Schedule. Such products shall be provided in quality which is in no way inferior to the existing products.

.2 The quality of the products that exist in the building, as apparent during prebid site visits, shall serve as the minimum Specification requirement for strength, appearance and other characteristics.

.4 Transitions .1 Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make the transition as smooth and

workmanlike as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so as to make the patch or transition invisible to the eye at a distance of one metre.

.2 In cases of extreme change of level (50 mm or more), obtain instructions from the Consultant as to method of making transition. Either stepping, bulkheading, encasement, ramping, sloping or change of transition line shall be employed, or a combination of these, as directed in each case by the Consultant.

.5 Matching .1 Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to its condition

at the time of the start of the Work. .6 Overall Requirement That the Work be Complete

.1 Where a product or type of construction occurs in the existing building, and is not specified as a part of the new work, provide such products or types of construction as needed to patch, extend or match the existing work.

.2 These specifications will generally not describe existing products or standards of execution, nor will they enumerate products which are not a part of the new construction. The existing product is its own specification.

.3 The presence of any product or type of construction in the old work shall cause its patching, extending or matching to be performed, as necessary to make the work complete and consistent, to identical standards of quality.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

1.9 REPAIR .1 Replace work damaged in the course of alterations, except at areas approved by the Consultant for

repair. .2 Where full removal of extensive amounts of almost-suitable work would be needed to replace

damaged portions, then filling, spackling, straightening and similar repair techniques, followed by full painting or other finishing, will be permitted.

.3 If the repaired work is not brought up to the standard for new work, the Consultant will direct that it be cut out and replaced with new work at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.10 CLEANING .1 Each Successive Trade

.1 As the trade finishes its work on each part of the alterations work and related new work, it shall clean up its work area and make work surfaces ready for the work of the succeeding trades.

.2 Spillage, overspray, collections of dust or debris, damage to Owner-occupied spaces shall be cleaned or remedied immediately by the responsible trade.

.2 Each Area as It is Completed .1 As soon as work in each area of the alterations is complete, clean up all surfaces, remove

equipment, salvage and debris and return in condition suitable for use by the Owner as quickly as possible.

.3 Prior to final acceptance, review final cleaning with Owner's representative and the Consultant.

END OF SECTION

05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Shop fabricated exterior steel guard rail.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 90 00 - Painting: Field painting of metal fabrications.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A53/A53M-12 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded

and Seamless. .2 ASTM A240/A240M-15a - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel

Plated, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. .3 ASTM A307-12 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. .4 ASTM A449-14 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel Heat Treated,

120.105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use. .5 ASTM A500/A500M-13 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. .6 ASTM A501-07 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing. .7 ASTM A563m-07(2013) - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric). .8 ASTM F3125 - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat

Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions

.9 CSA-G40.20-13/G40.21-13 - General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steel.

.10 CSA-W47.1-09 - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel.

.11 CSA-W48-14 - Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.

.12 CSA-W55.3-08 (R2013) - Certification of Companies for Resistance Welding of Steel and Aluminum.

.13 CSA-W59-13 - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

.14 SSPC (The Society for Protective Coatings) - Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA .1 Design metal guards, railings and all components to meet or exceed the requirements of OBC Article

4.1.5.14 Loads on Guards. .2 Design steel components and fastening to meet or exceed the requirements of OBC Part 4 as required

and applicable to each piece.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Shop Drawings:

.1 Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.

.2 Indicate welded connections using standard welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

.3 Shop Drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the structural engineer, licensed in the Place of Work, responsible for the design. Engineering design shall mean to include, but is not limited to: platform framing and grating, railings and guards (not attached to stair assembly), anchorage and fastening requirements.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Welders' Certificates: Submit to Division 01 requirements, certifying welders employed on the Work,

verifying qualification within the previous twelve (12) months to CSA-W47.1 (steel), CSA-W47.2 (aluminum), CSA-W55.3.

.2 Welded Steel Construction: CSA-W59.

.3 Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the place where the Project is located.

.4 Fabricator: company specializing in welding of structural building components with three (3) years documented experience and approved under CSA W47.1 and CSA W55.3.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Prior to fabrication, verify existing conditions and take field measurements to ensure perfect fit of

fabricated items. .2 Report deficiencies and misalignments to Consultant prior to fabrication and installation.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL .1 Sheet Steel: CSA-G40.20. .2 Steel Sections and Plates: CSA-G40.20/G40.21. .3 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M. .4 Steel Tubing: ASTM A501 and ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. .5 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307,

.1 Galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M for galvanized components and interior applications.

.2 Stainless Steel, Type 304, for all exterior or wet applications or in locations as noted on Drawings.

.3 Machine Bolts: carbon and alloy steel, to ASTM A307/A307M, Grade A, externally and internally threaded standard fasteners. Hot dipped galvanized where noted.

.4 High Strength Bolts: to ASTM F3125/F3125M, including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers; type 1 for interior applications and type 3 for exterior applications.

.6 Welding Materials: Type required for materials being welded to CSA W59.

.7 Welding Filler Material: CSA-W48.

.8 Shop and Touch-Up Primer: MPI #79, anti-corrosive alkyd.

.9 Primer: As specified in Section 09 91 10.

.10 Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: CGSB 85-GP-16M zinc-rich primer.

2.2 FABRICATION .1 Prior to fabrication site verify existing conditions and take field measurements to ensure perfect fit of

fabricated items. .2 Fabricate components to CAN/CSA-S136. .3 Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. .4 Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. .5 Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. .6 Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,

flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. .7 Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent

with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

.8 Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.3 FABRICATION TOLERANCES .1 Squareness: 3 mm maximum difference in diagonal measurements. .2 Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1.6 mm. .3 Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1.6 mm. .4 Maximum Bow: 3 mm in 1.2 m. .5 Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1.6 mm in 1.2 m.

2.4 FINISHES - STEEL .1 Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SPCC SP 2. .2 Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. .3 Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. .4 Prime paint items with two (2) coats.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. .2 Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal or aluminum where site welding is required. .2 Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to

appropriate sections. .3 Make provisions for erection loads with temporary bracing.

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. .2 Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. .3 Field weld components indicated on Approved Shop Drawings. .4 Perform field welding to CSA W59 requirements. .5 Field bolt and field weld to match shop bolting and welding. .6 Provide fasteners and anchors necessary to secure components rigidly in place. .7 Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. .8 After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to

be in contact with concrete.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 6 mm. .2 Maximum Out-of-Position: 6 mm.

END OF SECTION

06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Finish carpentry items. .2 Provide miscellaneous wood trims, panel boards for electrical, telephone and other equipment. .3 Provide nailing strips and blocking for Architectural Woodwork and other components noted to require

blocking. .4 Receive and install: Items from Section 06 41 11 Architectural Cabinetwork.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 09 91 10 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ANSI/NPA A208.1-2009 - Particleboard. .2 ASTM E84-13a - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .3 ASTM D2832-92(2011) - Standard Guide for Determining Volatile and Nonvolatile Content of Paint and

Related Coatings. .4 ASTM D5116-10 Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic

Emissions From Indoor Materials/Products. .5 BHMA A156.9-2010 - Cabinet Hardware. .6 CAN/CGSB 11.3-M87 - Hardboard. .7 CAN/CSA-O80 Series-08 (R2012) - Wood Preservation. .8 CSA-O121-08 (R2013) - Douglas Fir Plywood. .9 CSA-O141-05 (R2009) - Softwood Lumber. .10 CSA-O151-09 - Canadian Softwood Plywood. .11 CSA-O153-13 - Poplar Plywood. .12 AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) – 2nd Edition, 2014. .13 CHPVA (Canadian Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association) - Official Grading Rules for Canadian

Hardwood Plywood-2010. .14 NEMA LD3-2005 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates (HPDL). .15 NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2010

edition. .16 NHLA (National Hardwood Lumber Association).

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination:

.1 Coordinate with other work having a direct bearing on work of this section.

.2 Coordinate the work with electrical and plumbing rough-ins, installation of associated and adjacent components, and finishes.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. .2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories, and hardware, to a minimum scale of 1:10.

.2 Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Provide application instructions.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work to Premium quality. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. .3 Construct full size mock-up on site of each of the following (including all finishes):

.1 Interior wood ceiling panels and exterior soffits.

.2 Interior wood panels and trims.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Protect work from moisture damage.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS .1 Hardwood Lumber (HL) for Window and Door Trim: FAS Grade North American eastern Poplar species,

maximum moisture content of 15%, of quality suitable for receiving high-quality opaque paint finish. Utilize 19mm thickness for all miscellaneous trim.

2.2 ADHESIVE .1 Adhesives are to be Low VOC content, unless the application does not recommend it for a specific use. .2 Adhesive: to CSA O112 Series and ASTM D2832; Polyvinyl acetate adhesive. .3 Adhesive for High Humidity Areas: to CSA O112 Series, Type I and II water resistant area formaldehyde

adhesive. .4 Adhesive for locations exposed to weather: to CSA O112 Series, Class I - Type I, or Class II - Type I

phenol or resorcinol resin adhesive. .5 Contact Adhesive: water base type. .6 Wall Adhesive: solvent release, cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving

durable bond. .7 Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer and AWMAC to suit application.

2.3 FASTENERS .1 Fasteners: Unfinished steel, unless otherwise noted in Drawings, of size and type to suit application. .2 Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded, galvanized steel.

2.4 ACCESSORIES .1 Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Softwood lumber of SPF species. .2 Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. .3 Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish colour.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

2.5 FABRICATION .1 Fabricate to AWMAC Premium standards. .2 Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. .3 When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim

for scribing and site cutting. .4 Use running members in greatest lengths obtainable. .5 Machine dressed wood shall be slow fed using sharp cutters and finished work shall be free from drag,

feathers, slivers, or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding. .6 In finished work machine sand exposed surfaces in shop and hand sand on job site to even smooth

surface, fee from scratches, ready for finishing. .7 Frame materials with tight joints rigidly held in place. Use glue blocks where necessary. .8 Assemble work in shop and deliver ready for installation, as far as practicable. Leave ample allowance

for fitting and scribing on job. .9 Take care to prevent opening up of glue lines in finished work. .10 Design construction methods for the expansion and contraction of materials. .11 Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Locate prominent joints where directed by

Consultant. Intermediate joints between supports not permitted. .12 Mortise and tenon joints shall be glued and pinned. .13 Glue, blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified. Where surface fasteners are not possible,

confirm locations with Consultant, set nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface. Conceal nailing of tongued and grooved work.

.14 Accurately scribe, cope and mitre members where required.

.15 Finished woodwork shall be free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shakes, and other defects and shall be selected for colour and grain.

.16 Take field dimensions and fabricate work to suit field dimensions.

.17 Fasten wood nailers, blocking solidly to adjacent materials in true planes.

.18 Check access clearance at site before assembling large units or components in factory for shipment to site.

.19 Provide all blocking coming in direct contact with millwork in accordance with applicable provision set forth herein.

.20 Comply with glue manufacturer's recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue shelf life, pot life, working life, mixing, spreading, assembly time, time under pressure and ambient temperature.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the reviewed Shop Drawings. .2 Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. .3 Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to

receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install work to AWMAC Architectural Woodworks Standards, Premium Quality Standard. .2 Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. .3 Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1 mm. Do not use additional

overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

.4 Install all carpentry and millwork shown on drawings or as specified for completion of the work. Cooperate with other trades in installing items supplied by other sections.

.5 Set and secure all materials and components in place, rigid plumb and square.

.6 Install all work in accordance with the best practice of skilled craftspeople specialized in work specified and to the requirements of other trades.

.7 Be responsible for methods of construction and for ensuring that materials are rigidly and securely attached and will not be loosened by work of other trades.

.8 Joints made on site shall be equal in quality and workmanship to joints made in the shop.

.9 Apply water resistant building paper or bituminous coating over wood framing members in contact with masonry or cementitious construction.

.10 On completion, remove manufacturers identification marks and clean surfaces.

.11 Install with concealed fasteners using glue, blind screw or nail all work unless otherwise specified. Where surface fasteners are not possible, confirm locations with Consultant, set nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface. Conceal nailing of tongued and grooved work.

.12 Install architectural woodwork as specified in Section 06 41 11.

.13 Seal gaps and joints as specified in Section 07 92 00.

3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING .1 Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. .2 Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 91 10. .3 Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious

materials.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation from True Position: 1.5 mm. .2 Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1 mm.

END OF SECTION

06 41 11 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETWORK

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Custom shop fabricated cabinet units and woodwork. .2 Countertops. .3 Cabinet hardware.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry .2 Section 09 91 10 - Painting: Site finishing of cabinet. .3 Division 15 - Mechanical.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ANSI/NPA A208.1-2009 - Particleboard. .2 ASTM A153/A153M-09 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. .3 ASTM E84-13a - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .4 ASTM F1667-15: Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes and Staples. .5 BHMA A156.9-2010 - Cabinet Hardware. .6 CAN/CSA-O141-05 (R2009): Softwood Lumber. .7 AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) – 2nd Edition, 2014. .8 NEMA LD3-2005 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates (HPDL). .9 National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA): Grading Rules. .10 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA): Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. .11 NFPA 260-2003: Standard Methods of Test and Classification System for Cigarette Ignitions Resistance

of Components of Upholstered Furniture. .12 CAN/ULC S109-03: Flame Tests of Flame Resistant Fabrics and Films.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Pre-installation Meetings: Convene one (1) week before starting work of this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint

details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. .2 Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. .3 Samples:

.1 Submit 300 x 300 mm size samples, illustrating cabinet finish, edging, edge banding, trim joints and shop-applied finish.

.2 Submit 300 mm long samples, illustrating profile sizes and shapes, quality and wood grain and shop-applied finish.

.3 Submit manufacturer's samples, illustrating countertop finishes.

.4 Submit sample board of all hardware and accessory components listed, illustrating materials and finishes.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Provide application instructions.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform work to Premium quality. .2 Perform cabinet construction to Premium quality. .3 Fabricator Qualifications: Company in good standing with AWMAC and specializing in fabricating

Products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. .4 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Store Products under waterproof cover both in transit and at the Place of the Work in a manner to

prevent damage to Products, to any existing building or property or to the Work. .2 Store completed Products in a dry, clean area where it does not hinder the progress of the Work. .3 Do not store or install Products in the Work until the building is dry and heated.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity

conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.

1.10 WARRANTY .1 Provide a two year warranty on the work of this Section, commencing on the date of Substantial

Completion. The warranty terms shall be the same as those provided under the terms of AWMAC Certificate of Guarantee however the foregoing shall not be construed to mean that the architectural woodwork subcontractor or supplier must be a member of AWMAC or that an AWMAC Certificate of Gaurantee must be provided.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 CASEWORK MATERIALS .1 All plywood, board and panel products listed below shall be manufactured and fabricated using low

VOC and formaldehyde free glues and/or resins/binders, unless specifically stated in the AWMAC guides for the specific use(s) or condition(s).

.2 Hardwood Plywood (HP): CHPVA, Type HP-1, Architectural G2S; Graded to AWMAC Premium installation; sizes and thicknesses as indicated on Drawings and contained in this Section. .1 Core: particle core, type of glue recommended for application; .2 Veneer Faces: maple species, flat sliced; of clear, book match grain capable of receiving high-

quality transparent finish. .3 Particle Board (PB): ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2; minimum 635 kg/m3 density, 6% maximum moisture

content; no added urea formaldehyde (nauf)l; certified EPP by Composite Panel Association; thicknesses as indicated on Drawings and contained in this Section.

2.2 ACCESSORIES .1 Adhesive for Dry Area Exposures: to CSA O112.10: Polyvinyl adhesive. Type recommended by AWMAC

to suit application. .2 Solid Wood Edge Banding (WB): 6 mm solid wood, AWMAC Premium Grade, Type 2, Species to match

plywood veneer. .3 Fasteners: Plain finish, size and type to suit application in non-metal components. Avoid dissimilar

metals and provide fasteners to match metal component being fastened.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

.4 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Size and type to suit application; plain finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.

.5 Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

.6 Joint Sealants: as specified in Section 07 92 00.

2.3 HARDWARE .1 Shelf Standards (Pilaster Strip): 16 mm wide, 4 mm deep, perforated metal stip, zinc plated; lengths as

required. Model: 2332GXX by Richelieu or K255ZC series by Marathon Hardware. .2 Shelf Brackets (Pilaster Clip): Heavy duty bent metal clips, zinc plated. Model: CP2562G by Richelieu or

K256BC by Marathon Hardware. Provide 20 additional clips. .3 Drawer and Door Pulls: D-pull, 160 mm centre to centre size, polished stainless steel. Model:

"Contemporary Stainless Steel Handle Pull" 745 - BP7544160171 by Richelieu. .4 Cabinet and Drawer Locks: Heavy duty, keyed cylinder cam lock, two (2) keys per lock, keyed alike

within a room. Provide offsets where required. Finish to match adjacent door/drawer pull finishes. Provide one lock per door/drawer. Elbow catches using adjacent doors will not be accepted unless approved by Consultant. Products by Richelieu, Marathon Hardware, and Compx are considered acceptable for use.

.5 Hinges (standard): Euorpean style, fully concealed, knuckle disappearing, 3-dimensional independent adjustment, articulate, metal hinges, screw on with cup inset in door type, for full or half overlay as required, with soft-closing spring accommodating 110, 125 and 175 degree angles, 95 degree openings on doors opening against a wall. Satin nickel plated finish. One pair per door up to counter height, two pairs on full height doors. Basis of design: CLIP Top Blumotion by Blum, 105-C80 DTC Soft-Close Series Hinges by Marathon Hardware, Sensys Hinges with Silent System by Hettich, or approved alternate.

.6 Door Bumper: 3 mm thick x 10 mm OD polyurethane self-adhering bumper. Clear colour.

.7 Linear Bar Grilles: .1 In Countertops: heavy duty, extruded aluminum bar grille, complete with extruded aluminum,

19mm wide, model 750 border (Type C concealed bracket mounting) with precision mitred corners, clear anodized finish, one piece units up to 1830mm in length. All cores shall be factory welded to the perimeter frame. “Series LBPH Grilles” as manufactured by Price Industries with 25C Pencil Proof grilles (zero degree deflection), g.

.2 In Kickplates: heavy duty, extruded aluminum bar grille, complete with extruded aluminum, 19mm wide, model 750 border (Type A mounting) with precision mitred corners, black powder coat finish, one piece units up to 1830mm in length. All cores shall be factory welded to the perimeter frame. “Series LBPH Grilles” as manufactured by Price Industries with 25C Pencil Proof grilles (zero degree deflection).

2.4 PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS .1 Postformed Laminate: NEMA LD3, high pressure laminate, Grade HGP; Colour and texture as later

selected by Consultant from full colour range and finishes from either Formica, or Nevamar, or Wilsonart, or Arborite at the Consultants discretion.

.2 Nosing Profile: Postformed profile with eased edges as indicated on drawings.

.3 Edge Treatment: laminate to match countertop colour.

.4 Core Material: Particleboard.

2.5 FABRICATION .1 Prior to fabrication, verify existing conditions and take field measurements from site necessary to

ensure a perfect fit for Work of this Section.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

.2 Obtain governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or abut appliances, equipment and other materials.

.3 Fabricate cabinets to CAN3-A278, door tolerances to AWMAC Premium grade.

.4 Comply with CAN3-A172-M79, Appendix 'A'.

.5 Fabricate Products to AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards, Premium Grade.

.6 Provide cabinet units to sizes as indicated on drawings plus/minus [25 mm ], or as directed by Consultant. Size units for plus/minus 25 mm filler strip against adjacent walls and bulkheads.

.7 Fabricate units to profiles indicated on drawings.

.8 Fabricate each module to be self supporting with both exterior gables finished to allow removal and relocation without any alteration to casework.

.9 Pre-drill and cut mounting holes for sinks, faucets, valves, and electrical receptacles.

.10 Maximum unsupported shelf span not to exceed 760 mm .

.11 Shop prepare and identify components for matching during site assembly.

.12 Rabbet and screw adjustable shelving pilasters strips to gables.

.13 Pre-drill holes in gables to receive adjustable shelving pins. Provide ferrow sleeves in drilled holes.

.14 Install bumpers at top and bottom of each cabinet door and drawer.

.15 Adjust doors and drawers to proper operation prior to and after installation.

.16 For upper and lower corners, provide starter unit cabinet, with gable at intersection of adjoining cabinet, unless noted otherwise.

.17 Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

.18 When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for site cutting and scribing.

.19 Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum [600 mm ] from sink cut-outs.

.20 Apply wood laminate by grain matching adjacent sheets to book matching.

.21 Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.

.22 Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.

.23 Form shaped profiles and bends as indicated, using postforming grade laminate to laminate manufacturer's instructions.

.24 Use straight self-edging laminate strip for flatwork to cover exposed edge of core material. Chamfer exposed edges uniformly at approximately 20 degrees. Do not mitre laminate edges.

.25 Apply laminated plastic liner sheet to interiors of all cabinets and backs of door panels where case bodies and doors constructed of plastic laminate on particleboard core.

.26 Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at [400 mm ] on centre.

.27 Provide cut-outs for fixtures and fittings, plumbing fixtures, appliances, outlet boxes, and inserts. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges.

2.6 CABINET FABRICATION .1 Flush overlay doors and drawers on gable end "European" style construction. .2 Fabricate casework to AWMAC premium quality grade. .3 Case Construction (Wood Veneer) – Type as indicated on drawings:

.1 All joints shall be glued rebate, or glued and dowelled or glued and screwed with appropriate screw connectors approved by Consultant. Plain or nailed butt joints are not acceptable.

.2 Case Bodies (exterior and interior surfaces): 19 mm wood veneer plywood, grain direction vertical, matched.

.3 Backs: 12 mm wood veneer plywood, grain direction vertical, matched.


Page 5


217102

April 2018

.4 Doors: 19 mm wood veneer plywood, grain direction vertical, matched.

.5 Shelves: .1 Shelving (exposed or concealed in cabinet interiors): 19 mm wood veneer plywood. .2 Shelving shall be full depth of cabinets. .3 Front edges of all shelves shall have specified solid wood edgebanding, sides and back

are to receive veneer tape edgebanding. .4 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds and rough bucks and sleepers: Softwood lumber. .5 Wood trims and nosings: Select Grade Hardwood, species indicated. .6 Counters: post formed plastic laminate as noted on drawings. .7 Supply and install cabinet hardware, in quantity required for doors, shelves, and drawers. .8 When installing locking hardware and mechanisms ensure independent operation of doors and

drawers. Do not rely on catches or other doors/drawers to be locked for hardware to function. .9 No exposed fasteners allowed in exposed gable ends.

2.7 FINISHING .1 Sand work smooth and set exposed nails. .2 Apply wood filler in exposed nail indentations. .3 On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of

types recommended for applied finishes. .4 Shop finish hardwood Products to AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards, System 12 -

Polyurethane, water-based, premium grade for transparent finish. Colour and sheen as later selected by Consultant.

.5 Shop finish composite panel and softwood Products to AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards, System 4 - Latex acrylic, water-based, premium grade for opaque finish. Colour and sheen as later selected by Consultant.

.6 Seal/stain and varnish exposed to view surfaces.

.7 Seal/stain and varnish internal exposed to view and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only.

.8 Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.

2.8 SHIPPING .1 Protect units with factory applied wrapping to prevent damage during shipping. .2 Where hot melt adhesives have been used or where low temperatures will have adverse effect on

cabinets, protect units from freezing.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. .2 Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION .1 Provide templates, data for all blocking, reinforcing, nailers to be built-in to receive Work of this

Section. .2 Provide detailed installation instructions, and reviewed shop drawings to guide installation. .3 Provide material required for touch ups of finishes damaged during installation.


Page 6


217102

April 2018

3.3 INSTALLATION .1 Install Work to AWMAC Premium Grade. .2 Where possible, assemble finished wood work at the shop and deliver ready for installation. .3 Accurately fit joints and mitres and set nail heads ready for finishing. .4 Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. .5 Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. Provide wood blocking,

framing or furring shown on Drawings as part of the casework fabrication or erection. .6 Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining counter tops and cabinet units. .7 Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1 mm. Do not use

additional overlay trim for this purpose. .8 Use draw bolts and splines to from tight, flush, hairline joints. Accurately fit joints true to plane ,

located joints over bearing or supporting surfaces. .9 Provide heavy duty fasteners, securely anchoring cabinets to floor, ceiling and wall surfaces. Use only

concealed type fasteners. .10 Secure counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. .11 Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to

match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. .12 Coordinate and provide cut outs for sinks, service fittings and electrical outlets. Coordinate with other

Sections for connection to building services. .13 Where access is required to valves and other mechanical and electrical components located behind

casework, provide suitably removable access panels, each secured with minimum of 4 screws. .14 Provide closer and filler strips in matching finish as required to ensure neat and complete finished

assembly. .15 Seal gaps and joints in wet areas with mildew resistant joint sealer and in non-wet areas with general

purpose interior sealant. Sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00. .16 Correct and/or touch-up any damaged or deficient work to match shop finish.

3.4 ADJUSTING .1 Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. .2 Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.5 CLEANING .1 Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Surface preparation. .2 Painting.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop primed items. .2 Section 32 17 24 - Painted Pavement Markings.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 MPI (Master Painters Institute) - Architectural Painting Specifications Manual and Maintenance

Repainting Manual. .2 CAN/CGSB-85.100-93: Painting. .3 SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council): Painting Manual, Volume 2 - Systems and Specifications.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS .1 Coordination: Coordinate with other Work having a direct bearing on Work of this section. .2 Scheduling:

.1 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.

.2 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about building.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data:

.1 Submit Product data on all specified finishing products.

.2 Submit copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.

.3 A list of materials proposed for use on the Work, prepared by paint manufacturer, shall be submitted in writing to the Consultant for approval 60 days before the materials are required. The list shall bear the manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are of the best quality made by the company.

.2 Samples: .1 Prepare and submit samples of each of the various finishes to the Consultant for approval at

least 30 days prior to material being required. Submit samples in triplicate on [300 x 300 mm ] material. Identify each sample as to job, finish, colour schedule identifier, formula, name of manufacturer, colour name, number, sheen name and gloss values, date and name of Contract and Sub-Contractor.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements including special surface

preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. .2 Schedule:

.1 If requested, submit Work schedule for various stages of Work when painting occupied areas for Consultant's review and Owner's approval.

.2 Submit schedule minimum of forty-eight (48) hours in advance of proposed operations.

.3 Obtain written authorization from Consultant for changes in Work schedule.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 2


217102

April 2018

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS .1 Record Documentation: Upon completion, provide itemized list of products used including the

following: .1 Manufacturer's name. .2 Product name, type and use. .3 Colour coding number. .4 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. .2 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section. All work is to be

completed by skilled workers with minimum five (5) years documented experience. .3 Conform to MPI Painting Manual requirements for materials, preparation and workmanship. .4 Paint Products: Paint manufacturers and paint Products listed under the Approved Product List

section of the MPI Painting Manual. .5 Notify General Contractor in writing of defects or problems, prior to commencing painting work, or

after prime coat shows defects in substrate condition or preparation.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes, storage, mixing,

application and disposal of paint and related waste materials.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION .1 Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers showing manufacturer's name, type of paint,

brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, colour designation, and written instructions for mixing and reducing.

.2 Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 10 degrees C and a maximum of 32 degrees C, in dry, ventilated area and as required by manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Provide adequate fireproof storage lockers and warnings as required by authorities having jurisdiction for storing toxic and volatile/explosive/flammable materials.

.4 Provide CO2 fire extinguisher of minimum 9 kg capacity in storage area.

.5 Protection: .1 Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulins to protect floors in areas assigned for the storage

and mixing of paints. .2 Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors, furnishings

and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical and special equipment, hardware, and all other components of the building which do not require painting, from paint spotting and other soiling during painting process.

.3 Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of painting.

.4 Protect paint materials from fire and freezing.

.5 Keep waste rags in metal drum containing water and remove from building at end of each working shift.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 3


217102

April 2018

1.11 SITE CONDITIONS .1 Ambient Conditions:

.1 Do not perform painting or decorating Work when ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C for both interior and exterior work, or as required by paint product manufacturer.

.2 Do not perform painting or decorating Work when relative humidity is above 85% or when dew point is less than 3 degrees C variance between the air/surface temperature required by paint Product manufacturer.

.3 Provide suitable weatherproof covering and sufficient heating facilities to maintain minimum ambient air and substrate temperatures for twenty-four (24) hours before, during and after paint application.

.4 Do not perform painting and decorating Work when maximum moisture content of substrate exceeds: .1 Wood: 15%. .2 Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 %. .3 Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12%.

.5 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.

.6 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.

.7 Provide minimum lighting level of 323 lux is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated.

1.12 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinner, solvents, etc.) are regarded

as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on these controls from the authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Dispose of waste materials in accordance with local and provincial authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility.

.4 Place non-reusable materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

.5 To reduce contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground, adhere to the following procedures: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no

case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and

ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery,

proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste

regulations. .5 Dry out empty paint cans prior to disposal or recycling. .6 Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive containers

and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature. .6 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials and deliver or arrange collection for

verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 4


217102

April 2018

1.13 WARRANTY .1 Provide two (2) year warranty on interior and exterior paint or varnish finishes, unless noted otherwise.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Use only materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers) listed in the latest

edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) on this project. .2 Ancillary materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents to be of highest quality product and

provided by an MPI listed manufacturer, and compatible with paint materials being used. .3 Where possible, all materials to be lead and mercury free with low VOC content. Use ECOLOGO paints

and coatings with volatile organic compound (VOC) contents less than 150 g/L for non-flat sheen coatings and 50 g/L for flat sheen coatings.

.4 Provide all material for each system from a single manufacturer.

.5 Fire Hazard: Flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with applicable code and local authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Patching Materials: filler as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the specific application and finish system.

.7 Fastener Head Cover Materials: filler as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the specific application and finish system.

.8 Where required, use only materials having a minimum MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E3 rating based on VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels.

.9 Where indoor air quality (odour) is an issue, use only MPI listed materials having a minimum E3 rating.

2.2 MIXING AND TINTING .1 Coatings: Ready-mixed and pre-tinted; re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to

ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity to a complete homogeneous mixture.

.2 Paste, Powder or Catalyzed Paint: Mixed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.3 Carefully mix and prepare paints and coating materials according to manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary strain before using.

.5 Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the colour of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each coat, but not create an issue with coverage.

.6 Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. .1 Use thinners only where approved by paint or coating system manufacturer. .2 Do not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations for addition of thinner. Do not use

kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints. .3 Thin paint for spraying in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.

2.3 FINISH AND COLOUR .1 Finish: To MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. .2 Colours and Finishes: Refer to Finish Schedule to be provided after award of Contract.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 5


217102

April 2018

.3 General: .1 Finish all exposed, non-prefinished materials/surfaces, as indicated in the Room Finish

Schedule, in the Drawings, and as described in herein. .2 Exposed means visible in the complete work. In the case of closets, cabinets and drawers, it

included the interiors. .3 In instances where materials specified are not suitable for a particular job application or are

contrary to the manufacturer's recommendations for use on a particular surface, such condition shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification and instruction.

.4 Finishes shall match approved samples, but Consultant reserves the right to make reasonable changes to finish specifications to obtain desired results without additional cost or obligation to the Owner.

.5 A colour chart giving colour schemes and gloss values for various areas will be prepared after tendering by the Consultant. The final selection of colours and surface textures of all finishes throughout, transparent (natural) or opaque (paint), shall rest solely with the Consultant.

.6 Do not paint baked enamel, chrome plated, stainless steel, aluminum or other surfaces finished with a final factory finish. All primed surfaces shall be finish painted under this Section. Exception: pre-painted mechanical grilles where directed by the Consultant.

.7 Paint all non-prefinished miscellaneous metal, doors, frames, mechanical and electrical items.

.8 Paint all radiators in occupied spaces.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS .1 Paint gloss is defined as the sheen rating of applied paint with the following values:

Gloss Level

Description Gloss @ 60 degrees Sheen @ 85 degrees

G1 Matte Finish (flat) 0 to 5 10 max. G2 Velvet-Like Finish 0 to 10 10 to 35 G3 Eggshell Finish 10 to 25 10 to 35 G4 Satin-Like Finish 20 to 35 35 min. G5 Traditional Semi-Gloss Finish 35 to 70 G6 Traditional Gloss 70 to 85 G7 High Gloss Finish More than 85

.2 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces as specified.

2.5 MANUFACTURERS .1 Manufacturers: Use only manufacturers and Products listed in the MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual. .2 Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoats produced by the same manufacturer as

the finish coats.

2.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS .1 Exterior Finishes: The following specifications apply to the finishing of all surfaces required to be

painted or varnished or stained or sealed, as indicated in the Drawings, and in the Exterior Colour Schedule to be provided later by the Consultant. All finishes shall comply with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 6


217102

April 2018

.2 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: .1 EXT 5.1B: Water based light industrial coating (over inorganic zinc primer), G5 finish.

.1 Primer: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer V110

.2 Top coat: Coronado Rust Waterborne Acrylic Enamel 90

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Division 01: Verify existing conditions before starting work. .2 Verify that substrate conditions and surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product

manufacturer. .3 Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that

may potentially affect proper application. .4 Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

.1 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.

.2 Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits.

.3 Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured. .5 Conditions and Surfaces:

.1 Check all surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not proceed if reading is higher than 12-15%, without written permission from the Consultant.

.2 Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production fo a first class job.

.3 Remove dust, grease, rust and extraneous matter from surfaces (except rust occurring on items specified to be primed under other Sections shall be remove and work re-primed by those Sections).

.4 A representative of the product manufacturer will inspect the surfaces to be painted prior to application, arrange for such inspection and provide written report to the Consultant.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. .2 Remove and store miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings such as electrical plates, hardware,

light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to painting. Clean and replace upon completion of painting Work in each area.

.3 Protect adjacent surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on doors, frames, glass, aluminum surfaces, equipment, piping, from painting operations with drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means.

.4 Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Start of finish painting of defective surfaces indicates acceptance of substrate and making good defects will be at no cost to Owner.

.5 Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items.

.6 Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and finish system.

.7 Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of, or limit, or direct traffic away or around work areas as required.

.8 Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

.9 Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 7


217102

April 2018

.10 Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.

3.3 APPLICATION .1 Apply paint or stain in accordance with CAN/CBSG 85.100 and the MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade

finish requirements. .2 Apply products to adequately prepared surfaces, within moisture limits and acceptable environmental

conditions. .3 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated or when wind or ventilation

conditions will not affect quality of finished surface. .4 Apply Products under adequate illumination. .5 Use methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. .6 Spraying will not be allowed unless specified herein or recommended by the paint manufacturer.

Obtain prior approval by Consultant. .7 Apply each coat to uniform finish. Spread finishes evenly and flow on smoothly without runs or sags. .8 Apply Products no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spread rate. Provide total dry film

thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. .9 Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats. .10 Unless otherwise approved, apply a minimum of four (4) coats of paint where deep or bright colours

are used to achieve satisfactory results. .11 Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects visible

from a distance up to 1000 mm. .12 Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. .13 Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. .14 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: completely cover substrate to a smooth, opaque surface of uniform

finish, colour, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be accepted.

.15 Match approved samples of colour, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

.16 Any area exhibiting incomplete or unsatisfactory coverage shall have the entire plane painted.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Acceptance of Surfaces - Painted surfaces may be rejected if any of the following are evident under

natural lighting in for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces: .1 Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a

distance of not less than 1000 mm. .2 Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a

distance of not less than 1000 mm. .3 Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal

viewing angles. .4 Final coats on any surface exhibit a lack of uniformity of colour, sheen, texture, and hiding

across full surface area. .2 Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects

are apparent to the inspector:

09 91 10 PAINTING

Page 8


217102

April 2018

.1 Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in coatings.

.2 Evidence of poor coverage at fastener heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets corners and re-enterant angles.

.3 Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or other contributory cause.

.4 Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from weather/moisture.

.5 Damage or contamination of paint due to blown contaiminants (dust, spray, other paints, etc.). .3 Make good rejected surfaces. Small areas may be touched up; large areas without sufficient dry film

thickness of coatings shall be repainted. Runs, sags or damaged paint shall be removed by scrapper or sanding prior to reapplication. Acceptance of repair and method is at the sole discretion of the Consultant.

3.5 CLEANING .1 Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove

daily from site. Dispose of materials in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Remove paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.

.3 Keep work areas free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.

END OF SECTION

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Conform to Division 01, General Requirements.

1.2 DESCRIPTION .1 Work Included:

.1 Stripping, clearing, grubbing filling and rough grading required by Work.

.2 Earth excavating, filling, backfilling, granular bases and sub-bases and compaction for civil and architectural Sections of the Work as specified.

.3 Rough Site Grading

.4 Dust Control .2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

.1 Section 01 00 01 General Requirements: cash allowance for geotechnical testing.

.2 Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving

.3 Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving

.4 Section 32 14 13 Precast Concrete Unit Paving

.5 Section 32 32 23 Segmented Concrete Retaining Wall System

1.3 DEFINITIONS: .1 Rough Grading:

.1 Sodded and Landscaped Areas: Grading to 100 mm below finish grade elevations shown. (See items 1.2.1 & 1.2.2 above).

.2 Paved Areas and Areas to Receive Slab-On Grade: Grading to elevation to receive granular base of pavement or slab.

.2 Rock Excavation .1 Include as rock excavation material excavated from solid masses of igneous, sedimentary or

metamorphic rock which, prior to removal, was integral with the parent mass. .2 Include as rock excavation boulders and rock fragments measuring in volume one cubic metre

or more and not as a result of blasting operations for this project. .3 Do not include as rock excavation the removal of dense tills, hardpan, frozen materials and any

other similar materials. .3 Earth Excavation

.1 Include as earth excavation the excavation of all other materials of whatsoever nature that do not come under the classification of “Rock Excavation”.

.2 Include as earth excavation corduroy from old roadbeds.

.3 Include as earth excavation frozen earth material.

.4 Include as earth excavation loose and shattered rock of fragment volume less than one cubic metre, from old rock embankments & from roadway or trench excavations through old rock cuts.

.5 Do not include as earth excavation boulders or rock fragments, regardless of their fragment volume, excavated from earth borrow pits and incorporated in this project.

.6 Clearing: cutting off trees and brush vegetative growth and disposing of felled trees, previously uprooted trees and stumps, and surface debris in accordance with OPSS 201 and OPSS 180.

.7 Grubbing: excavation and disposal of stumps and roots, boulders and rock fragments to not less than a specified depth below existing ground surface.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 2


217102

April 2018

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Qualifications of Designer of Shoring: Professional Engineer registered in structural/civil discipline with

an APEO Certificate of Authorization and $500,000 liability insurance policy. Provide proof of such qualifications to Consultant upon request.

.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Conform to the requirements of the following:

.3 Ontario Provincial Standards .1 Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS); Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD);

Ministry of Transportation and Communications of Ontario (MTC) Specifications form part of this contract.

.2 The text of all OPSS's are contained in the Manual "Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications": .1 Volume 1 - Construction .2 Volume 2 - Materials

.3 When a current MTO Standard Specification contains a reference to an MTC Standard Specification, which has been superseded by an OPSS, the reference shall be deemed to be to the OPSS of the same number with the following exceptions: Reference To: Means: .1 MTC Form 1000 OPSS 1001 .2 MTC Form 527 OPSS 127 .3 MTC Form 528 OPSS 128 .4 MTC Form 200 OPSS 201, 206, 209 and 212

.4 When an OPSS contains a reference to an OPSS, which has not yet been published, the reference shall be deemed to mean the MTO Standard Specifications of the same number.

.5 Regardless of which standards are contained in the OPSS Manuals, the Standards applicable to this contract are listed in the schedule of Provisions, Plans, Standard Drawings, Specifications and General Conditions.

.6 The OPSD's are contained in the Manual of Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings.

.7 When the Contract Drawings make reference to an MTC DD Standard Drawing, the appropriate OPSD is determined using the cross-reference list contained in the following MTO Highway Engineering Standard Drawings Manuals: .1 Roads, Barrier and Drainage - Book 1 .2 Electrical - Book 2

.8 When there is no OPSD listed in the cross-reference, the MTO DD Standard Drawing remains in effect.

.9 Any material, which is in the "List of Material to be Supplied from Designated Sources" (OPSS 128) shall be obtained only from the sources designated.

.10 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the relevant list from and to ensure that he has the lists currently in effect. "List of Material to be Supplied from Designated Sources" (OPSS 128) may be obtained from:

Head, Purchasing Materials and Operating Supplies Section Purchasing and Supply Office Supply and Services Branch, Central Building Ministry of Transportation of Ontario 1201 Wilson Avenue

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 3


217102

April 2018

.2 List of OPSS – General Conditions of a Contract - Not attached .1 120 (Nov. 2007) – The Use of Explosives .2 128 (Apr. 2006) – Supply of Materials from Designated Sources .3 180 (Nov. 2011) – Management and Disposal of Excess Material .4 201 (Nov. 2011) – Clearing, Close Cut Clearing, Grubbing & Removal of Surface

Boulders .5 206 (Nov.2009) – Grading .6 212 (Nov. 2013) – Earth Borrow .7 310 (Nov. 2010) – Hot Mixed, Hot Laid Asphaltic Concrete Paving and Hot Mix

Patching .8 314 (Nov. 2013) – Untreated Granular Subbase, Base Surface, Shoulder and

Stockpiling .9 351 (Nov. 2010) – Concrete Sidewalk .10 352 (Nov. 2000) – Concrete Steps .11 353 (Nov. 2010) – Concrete Curb and Gutter Systems .12 405 (Nov. 2008) – Pipe Subdrains .13 407 (Nov. 2007) – The Construction of Manholes, Catch Basins, Ditch Inlets and

Valve Chambers .14 408 (Nov. 2014) – Adjusting or Rebuilding Manholes, Catch Basins, Ditch Inlets and

Valve Chambers .15 410 (Nov. 2013) – Pipe Sewer Installation in Open Cut .16 421 (Nov. 2007) – Pipe Culvert Installation in Open Cut .17 501 (Nov. 2014) – Compacting .18 504 (Nov. 2009) – Preservation, Protection and Reconstruction of Existing Facilities .19 506 (Nov. 2013) – Dust Suppressants .20 510 (Nov. 2009) – Removals .21 511 (Nov. 2013) – RipRap, Rock Protection and Gravel Sheeting .22 514 (Apr. 2008) – Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting .23 516 (Nov. 2005) – Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Maintenance Holes,

Catch Basins, Ditch Inlets and Valve Chambers .24 517 (Nov. 2010) – Dewatering of Pipeline, Utility and Associated Structure

Excavation .25 518 (Nov. 2011) – Control of Water from Dewatering Operations .26 710 (Nov. 2010) – Pavement Marking .27 802 (Nov. 2010) – Topsoil .28 803 (Nov. 2010) – Sodding .29 804 (Nov. 2010) – Seeding and Cover .30 805 (Nov. 2010) – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Measures

.3 CAN/CSA-A23.1-09 (R2014), Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

.4 Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete for concrete materials mixes and methods.

.5 Geotechnical Engineer appointed as the testing agency and paid by cash allowance as specified in Section 01 00 01, will inspect work of this Section including the observation, inspection and/or testing of: .1 Founding soil on which concrete will be placed; .2 Fill materials; .3 Backfilling operations; .4 Compaction of granular sub-base and base materials required to be compacted.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 4


217102

April 2018

.6 Source Approval: .1 Inform Consultant of proposed source of aggregates and provide access for

sampling at least four weeks prior to commencing production. Submit samples of each fill type specified including representative sample of excavated material for analysis by testing agency.

.2 If the Consultant deems that materials from the proposed source do not or cannot be reasonably processed to meet the specified requirements, locate an alternative source for the material.

.3 Should a change of material source be proposed during the course of the work, advise Consultant four weeks in advance to allow sampling and testing.

.4 Acceptance of material source does not preclude future rejection if material is subsequently found to lack uniformity, fails to conform to specified requirements or if its field performance is found to be unsatisfactory.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY .1 Do not place excavated or fill material against stock-piled masonry materials, finished masonry or

precast concrete products to be exposed in the finished Work.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS .1 Existing Conditions:

.1 Protection: .1 Existing Underground Services:

.1 The location of existing utilities have been shown on the plans according to the best available information to permit the Contractor to prepare his Tender with a knowledge of the existence of such utilities along and across the line of the excavations to be made.

.2 No responsibility will be assumed by the Consultant nor the Owner for the correctness or completeness of the drawings with respect to existing utilities and should the Drawings of such be found to be incorrect or incomplete, the Contractor shall have no claim on that account.

.3 Where necessary, make necessary exploratory excavations to determine location of existing pipes, conduits, etc.

.4 The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of service if any utility or underground works were damaged by his operations. No extra compensation shall be allowed for any delays caused by repairs or maintenance of service to existing utilities or underground works.

.5 Before commencing work in any area of the Contract, the Contractor shall notify all Public Utility Companies and/or Municipal Authorities of his methods of treatment with regard to utilities and shall have the Utility Companies locate any existing utilities in that area. From this information, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, sustain in their places and protect from direct or indirect injury, except as specified otherwise, any and all poles and posts, overhead wires, fences, watermains, gas mains, public and private wells, sewers and drains, conduits, cables, service pipes, buildings, dwellings and all other structures or property in the vicinity of his work whether above ground or underground.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 5


217102

April 2018

.6 The Contractor shall assume all risks and be responsible for all expense, damages and claims, etc., attending the presence or proximity of any gas and water pipes, public or private sewers or drains, electric power and telephone conduits and wires and all other underground, surface or overhead structures which cross, or appear in the trench, tunnel or other excavations or any part of the work or are parallel with or adjacent to, but outside of, the said work.

.7 Where concrete, steel or timber is ordered in writing by the Consultant to be placed for the permanent support, or protection of utilities or other structures in or adjacent to the excavation, such concrete, steel or timber shall be supplied and installed at the expense of the Owner.

.2 Prevent damage to fencing, trees, landscaping, bench marks, existing buildings, existing pavement, utility lines, site appurtenances, water courses, root systems of trees which are to remain. .1 Repair any damaged items to approval of Consultant. .2 Replace any trees designated to remain, if damaged, as directed by Consultant.

.3 Take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to people and adjacent property through the excavation process.

.4 Sediment Control .1 Prevent the migration of sediments and pollution into the down stream drainage

courses. Conform to the requirements of OPSS 805 for sediment control requirements.

.2 Produce a sediment control plan for review by the Consultant before commencing any excavation. The Consultant's approval of the sediment control plan does not relieve the Contractor of hid responsibility for any damages caused as a result of his installed sediment control facilities. The Contractor is responsible to install and maintain the sediment control plan for the duration of the Work.

.3 OPSD 219.180, 219.190, 219.220 and 219.240 provide examples of types of acceptable sediment control devices.

1.7 LAYOUT OF THE WORK .1 Lines and Grades

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work and for the correctness of the position, elevation and alignment of all parts of the work in accordance with accepted survey procedures. Using qualified personnel and following accepted engineering practice, he shall calculate, layout, establish and maintain all lines and grades necessary for the construction and verification of the work. He shall provide such information on the calculations, layout, lines and grades as the Consultant may at any time require.

.2 The Consultant will provide basic horizontal and vertical control from which the location of the work may be determined. Horizontal control will consist of either survey reference points sufficient to locate the centreline, or coordinated control points and their values, sufficient to layout the work. Vertical control will consist of benchmarks at intervals through the work. During the progress of the work the Contractor shall notify the Consultant forthwith of any errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the geometric information and the controls provided by the Consultant.

.3 All reference points and benchmarks provided by the Consultant will be located and identified to the Contractor on the site at the start of the work. These reference points and benchmarks shall be preserved by the Contractor; in the event of their movement, destruction or removal by him, such reference points and benchmarks shall be replaced at his expense.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 6


217102

April 2018

.4 The Contractor will provide Grading Reports to the Consultant prior commencement of the works. The Grading Reports will establish the cross sectional elevations of Sub-Grade, Top of Sub-base and Top of Base of all pavement facilities (asphalt and concrete). The section interval shall be no more than 10 metres.

.5 The Contractor shall supply the Owner with all as-constructed horizontal and vertical data related to the layout of the Work before final acceptance.

.6 The Contractor shall advise the Consultant of the intended layout schedule at the project meetings by identifying the survey activities planned for the following week, including any miscellaneous surveying items.

.7 For the grading layout, stakes 25 x 50 x 600 mm, minimum shall be installed left and right of centreline at or near the right-of-way limits and in the areas where additional staking is required, such as intersections, bridges, and on horizontal and vertical curves. Staking intervals shall be as indicated above. The only data to be shown on these stakes shall consist of profile grade, off-set distance form centre-line, and the station location. The Contractor shall erect butterfly rods or batter boards at grade stake locations.

.8 The Contractor shall provide a complete set of off-set stakes with finished grade and stations for the following components of the work: .1 Drainage Items – sewers, road culverts, entrance culverts, manholes, and similar items. .2 Pavement Items – concrete base, concrete pavement, stabilized base, asphalt, pavement,

and similar items. Fine grading stakes shall be utilized for this work when pavement items form part of grading or granular work.

.3 Miscellaneous Items – sidewalk, curb and gutter, slope paving, structures, fencing, noise barrier, lighting, guide rail barrier, rip-rap, and similar items, as required by the Owner.

.9 For fine grading layout, including paving, fine grading stakes 25 x 50 x 600mm, shall be installed left and right of the control line at or near the subgrade shoulder break. These stakes shall be installed at an interval of 20m or less where the Contract Administrator deems appropriate, on horizontal and vertical curves, widening of intersection, and similar locations. The only data to be shown on the stake shall consist of profile grade, elevation, off-set distance from the control line and the station.

.10 The Contractor shall notify the Consultant when the subgrade is completed. A subgrade and granular base cross-section, three point section minimum, will be obtained by the Consultant and the grade accepted if construction is within the allowable tolerances. No granular material shall be placed until the subgrade is accepted.

TABLE 1 LAYOUT INTERVALS AND MEASUREMENT ACCURACY FOR CONSTRUCTION SURVEY – LAYOUT

ACTIVITY INTERVAL MEASUREMENT ACCURACY

REMARKS

Maximum for setting structure footing grades

10 m

Structure grades to be set to

1 mm

Adjustment to slope stake distances to allow for grubbing losses

300 mm

Set grades for earth grading to 10 mm

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 7


217102

April 2018

the nearest Set grades for granular to the

nearest 5 mm

Layout stake offset for curb and gutter

2 m, but may be varied to suit

conditions Stake layout for curb and

gutter 10 m May be necessary

to reduce for very sharp curves

Set curb and gutter grades to the nearest

1 mm

Staking maximum for layout of a radius (intersections)

3 m

TABLE 2 LAYOUT INTERVALS AND MEASUREMENT ACCURACY FOR CONSRUCTION SURVEY – CROSS SECTIONS

ACTIVITY INTERVAL MEASUREMENT ACCURACY

CROSS SECTIONS

Backsight and foresight readings to be taken to the nearest

10 mm

Maximum allowable error between adjacent bench marks

20 mm

Intermediate road readings to be taken to the nearest

10 mm

Earth cut

25 m

Rock cut

10 m

Rock cut with overburden

10 m

Muskeg excavation

25 m

Fills with stripping, sub-excavation or ditching

25 m

Transition from cut to fill

25 m

Fills

25 m

Earth or rock fills

25 m

Borrow pits

25 m

Maximum transverse interval for cross-section elevations

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 8


217102

April 2018

Earth

25 m

Rock

10 m

Borrow

25 m

Offset distances to be measured to the closest

100 mm

1.8 SCHEDULE OF WORK .1 Prior to start of clearing operations, lay out perimeter of the Work and extent of site fill. .2 Notify Consultant of construction likely to affect existing trees to remain. Consultant will designate

extent of trees and shrubs to remain. .3 Erect temporary fencing prior to start of work of this Section.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 FILL MATERIALS .1 Type 2 Fill: clean natural river sand and gravel material, free from clay, silt, loam, friable soluble

materials and vegetative matter. Well graded with 100% passing the 100mm sieve and not more than 15% passing the #200 sieve.

.2 Type 3 Fill: Granular "B" aggregates, Type 1, to OPSS Form #1010.

.3 Type 4 Fill: concrete sand conforming to CSA A23.1

.4 Type 5 Fill: Granular "A" to OPSS Form #1010.

.5 Type 6 Fill: 15 MPa concrete in accordance with , Cast-in-Place Concrete.

.6 Type 7 Fill: Clean approved native, excavated materials, free from waste materials, debris, rubbish, frozen portions, organic or cohesive matter and rocks larger than 100 mm in diameter. If a sufficient quantity of material is not available from the excavation, use imported fill having the same characteristics.

.7 Type 8 Fill: rock fill from on-site excavation and blasting operations.

.8 Type 9 Fill: Granular "B" aggregates, Type 2, to OPSS Form #1010.

2.2 DUST CONTROL PRODUCTS .1 Dust Suppressant Materials in accordance with OPSS 506.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 GENERAL .1 Inform Geotechnical Engineer appointed as testing agency of all excavation, backfilling and compaction

activity and coordinate required testing. .2 Minimize the area of impact to the site. .3 Coordinate required testing and inspection by Geotechnical Engineer appointed as testing agency

under Division 01.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 9


217102

April 2018

3.2 DUST SUPPRESSION .1 In accordance with OPSS 506. The Contractor shall take such steps as may be required to prevent dust

nuisance resulting from the Contractor's operations either within the right-of-way or elsewhere or by public traffic where it is the Contractor's responsibility to maintain a roadway through the work.

.2 Where the work requires the sawing of asphalt or the sawing or grinding of concrete, blades and grinders of the wet type shall be used together with sufficient water to prevent the incidence of dust, wherever dust would affect traffic or wherever dust would be a nuisance to commercial establishments and residents of the area where the work is being carried out. The cost of all such preventative measures shall be borne by the Contractor.

.3 The cost of water and calcium chloride authorized by the Consultant to reduce the dust caused by traffic on a roadway, which is the Contractor's responsibility to maintain for public traffic shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.3 CLEARING .1 Clear as indicated or as directed by Consultant, by cutting at a height of not more than 300mm above

ground. In areas to be subsequently grubbed, height of stumps left from clearing operations to be not more than 1000mm above ground surface.

.2 Cut off branches overhanging area cleared and unsound branches on trees designated to remain as directed by Consultant.

3.4 GRUBBING .1 Grub out stumps and roots to not less than 200 mm below ground surface. .2 Grub out visible rock fragments and boulders, greater than 300 mm in greatest dimension, but less

than 0.25 m3.

3.5 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL .1 Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or in any manner in which soil structure is

adversely affected. .2 Commence topsoil stripping of areas after area has been cleared of brush, weeds and grasses and

removed from site. .3 Strip topsoil to depths as required. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil. .4 Stockpile on site so as not to adversely affect areas not otherwise impacted by construction. Stockpile

height not to exceed 2m. .5 Dispose of unused topsoil off site. .6 Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction.

3.6 EXCAVATION GENERAL .1 Excavate to the extent, elevations and depths required for the completion of the Work, leaving

sufficient space for the removal of formwork, the application of waterproofing and insulation, and installation of weeping tiles.

.2 Found Strip Footings on undisturbed soil and to the criteria indicated, and as further directed by the Consultant.

.3 Review planned excavation and dewatering techniques and procedures with the Geotechnical Engineer of the Testing Agency prior to commencement of the excavation work.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 10


217102

April 2018

.4 Keep excavation free of water by bailing, pumping or a system of drainage as required, and provide pumps, suction and discharge lines or well points of sufficient capacity, and maintain until such time as the permanent drainage system is installed. Provide dewatering for utility installations in accordance with OPSS 517 and 518. Take all necessary measures to prevent the flow of water into the excavation.

.5 Protect the bottom and sides of excavated pits and trenches from freezing, and from exposure to the sun and wet weather to prevent cave-ins and softening of the bed upon which concrete or drains rest.

.6 Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials leveled and stepped at changes of levels with exception of excavations made for drainage purposes and those to slope as required.

.7 Excavate areas under concrete slabs on grade and where permanent roads and walks will occur to a depth sufficient to expose firm undisturbed subsoil, free of organic matter and to the Consultant's approval.

.8 If removal of earth causes displacement of adjacent earth, the earth so disturbed shall be removed.

.9 Remove soft, wet or unconsolidated ground and organic material encountered in excavating and fill void with compacted fill of quality as herein specified.

.10 Should the nature of the subsoil at the depths shown prove to be unsatisfactory to the Consultant for the placing of the structural work thereon, then upon the Consultant's written order, excavate to greater depth until a satisfactory bottom is reached.

.11 Surface against which concrete or fill is placed shall be kept free of frost.

.12 Frozen surfaces against which concrete or fill is to be placed shall be thawed out to unfrozen depth. Remove thawed softened material to firm base.

3.7 TRENCH EXCAVATING .1 Excavate with suitable machinery or by hand as may be necessary to depths and dimensions shown on

Drawings or required for work shown on Drawings. .2 Cut and trim sides of trenches evenly. .3 Keep the bottom of trenches clean and clear of loose material and slope or grade as required. .4 Do not excavate more than 30m of trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave more

than 15m uncovered at the end of the day.

3.8 BACKFILLING .1 Proceed promptly with backfilling as the building progresses and work to be backfilled has been

inspected and approved by the Consultant and his approval to backfill obtained. .2 Divisions 15 and 16 will provide bedding and backfill to 300mm over pipe only, backfill balance of

trench to requirements contained herein. .3 Backfill evenly on both sides of foundation walls to avoid unequal fill pressures on walls and, when

possible, after first floor or roof framing has been installed. .4 Withdraw shoring material during backfill. Do not leave lumber in place without the Consultant's

approval. .5 Place min. 600 mm of specified material against all exterior building walls and retaining wall. .6 Well tamp and water down backfill. The amount of water shall be as directed by the Geotechnical

Engineer appointed as testing agency and shall be principally for increasing density of fill. .7 Place fill around footings as soon as possible when frost protection is required. .8 Place all backfill and fill in layers with maximum thickness of 150 mm to 200 mm. Compact each layer

before placing next. .9 Areas adjoining vulnerable building components and retaining walls which cannot be thoroughly

compacted by drawn equipment, shall receive equivalent compaction with mechanical tampers. .10 Fill shall be free of snow and ice.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 11


217102

April 2018

.11 Do not place fill on frozen, snow or ice-covered ground.

.12 Use of Geotextiles .1 Place geotextile material by unrolling onto graded surface in orientation, manner and locations

indicated and retain in position. .2 Place geotextile material smooth and free of tension stress, folds, wrinkles and creases. .3 Place geotextile material on sloping surfaces in one continuous length from toe of slope to

upper extent of geotextile. .4 Overlap successive strips of geotextile 500mm over previously laid strip. .5 Protect installed geotextile material from displacement, damage or deterioration before, during

and after placement of material layers. .6 Replace damaged or deteriorated geotextile to approval of the Consultant. .7 Do not permit vehicle traffic directly on laid geotextile.

3.9 GRANULAR FILL UNDER CONCRETE SLABS, SIDEWALKS, ASPHALT AND UNIT PAVERS .1 Place in accordance with OPSS 314. .2 The fill shall be deposited in layers of such thickness that the equipment being used for compacting

can produce the specified density. If lumps are present in the material, each layer shall be continuously disced in order to ensure proper compaction.

.3 During and immediately after leveling and discing, each layer of fill shall be thoroughly compacted by the use of approved mechanical equipment until the required level is reached.

.4 After a period adequate to reveal settlement has passed as determined by the Inspecting Geotechnical Engineer, additional fill shall be placed and compacted in all depressions to the Inspecting Geotechnical Engineer's satisfaction.

.5 Under all slabs on grade provide a sheet vapour barrier as specified. Follow details at foundation walls to ensure continuity of vapour barrier.

.6 Maintain finished base until placement of concrete or paving material.

3.10 WATER ON PREPARED SURFACES .1 Promptly remove, by approved methods, water rising from seeping of the soil or resulting from rainfall

wherever such water is on the surface of subgrade soil and compacted fill. .2 If any prepared subgrade soil is softened or disturbed by water then the Contractor shall: (a) without

extra cost to the Owner, remove the unsatisfactory soil and fill, and (b) bear all incidental costs in connection with additional excavation, backfilling and structural work for footings and foundations and additional excavation and placing and compacting of granular fill under concrete slabs.

3.11 EXTERIOR FILLING AND ROUGH GRADING .1 Site grade in accordance with OPSD 200.01, 201.01, 204.01 and 205 Series. .2 Cut and fill as required, areas of site to be paved, landscaped or which will require changes of contours

outside the building. .3 Before commencing grading, remove debris from the work site and place approved fill as specified and

cut, grade and consolidate by approved methods. .4 Grades shall provide slopes of a minimum of 2% for a distance of 3m from the building to provide

drainage there from and to uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are given and between such points and existing grade levels to a tolerance of within 20 mm in 3 m.

.5 Graded surfaces shall be free from coarse material and stones greater than 50 mm in diameter and left in a condition satisfactory to the Consultant.

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 12


217102

April 2018

.6 Settlement, if any occurs, shall be made up as soon as possible so that regular traffic in and around the Site will not be interrupted and so that work can proceed promptly.

.7 Rough grade to levels, profiles, and contours allowing for surface treatment as indicated. Grade to within 30mm of specified elevations but not uniformly high or low.

.8 Maintain fill and existing surface at approximately same moisture content to facilitate bonding.

.9 Embankments .1 Where indicated or directed by the Consultant, bench existing slopes in side hill or sloping

sections to ensure proper bond between new materials and existing surfaces. Obtain prior approval from Consultant of method to be used.

.2 Maintain a crowned surface during construction to ensure ready run-off of surface water. Do not place material in free standing water.

.3 With material containing less than 25% by volume of stone or rock fragments larger than 100mm, place and compact to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 200mm loose thickness. Consultant may authorize thicker lifts if specified compaction requirements can be attained. Compact to requirements for finished surface in accordance with Article 3.15.

3.12 RESTORATION OF STOCKPILE SITES .1 Restore areas of site used for stockpiling of materials to Consultant’s approval.

3.13 SURPLUS SOIL DISPOSAL .1 Excavated materials not required and not approved by the Consultant for the purpose of fill on the Site

shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the work site and disposed of in a location to be determined by the Contractor in accordance with the governing regulations and OPSS 180 management and Disposal of Excess Materials.

3.14 SCHEDULE OF FILL AND COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS

Area Sub-Base Fill Type

Sub-Base Compaction

SPDD

Sub-Base Compacted Depth (mm)

Base Fill Type

Base Compacted Depth (mm)

Base Compaction

SPDD .1 Asphalt Roads &

Parking Areas 3 100% 300 mm to underside of base course

5 150 100%

.2 Concrete Curbs and Walks 3 100% 150 min. to

underside of base course

5 or 9 150 100%

.3 Seeded / sodded areas 7 95% to underside

of base course topsoil - -

.4 Electrical wiring and raceways 4 100% 100 min.

all sides to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments

31 00 00 EARTHWORK

Page 13


217102

April 2018

.5 Under mechanical pipe 5 100% 150 to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments .6 Over mechanical

pipe 3 100% to underside of base course

to finish req'ments

to finish req'ments

to finish req'ments

.7 Trenches under seeded areas 7 95% to underside

of base course to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments .8 Trenches under

paving areas 7 / 95% / to underside of sub-base

course /

to finish req'ments

to finish req'ments

to finish req'ments

3 100% to underside of base course

.9 Backfill behind retaining walls 3 95% to underside

of base course to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments to finish

req'ments .10 Under unit paving

3 95% 150 mm. to underside of base course +

unit paver bedding

course as described in

Section 32 14 13

5 or 9 100 98%

END OF SECTION

32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING

Page 1


217102

April 2018

Section 32 12 16 - Asphalt Paving

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Asphaltic concrete paving, wearing binder or base course. .2 Aggregate base course.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 31 00 00 - Earthworks. .2 Section 32 14 13 - Precast Concrete Unit Paving: Pavers. .3 Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving: Concrete sidewalks.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 Ontario Provincial Standards

.1 Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS); Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD); Ministry of Transportation and Communications of Ontario (MTC) Specifications form part of this contract. .1 OPSS 313 Hot Mix Asphalt - End Result .2 OPSS 1001 Aggregates - General .3 OPSS 1003 Aggregates - Hot Mix Asphalt .4 OPSS 1101 Performance Graded Asphalt Cement

.2 Designated Sources for Materials (DSM) Manual

.3 MTO Laboratory Testing Manual: .1 LS-282 Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Cement and Analysis of Extracted Aggregate

from Bituminous Paving Mixtures .2 LS-292 Quantitative Determination of Asphalt Cement Content by Ignition and Analysis of

Remaining Aggregate From Bituminous Paving Mixtures .3 LS-306 Bulk Relative Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated

Specimens .4 LS 309 Superpave Mix Design .5 LS 311 Stone Mastic Asphalt Mix Design .6 LS-313 Method of Test for Preparing and Determining the Density of Hot Mix Asphalt

(HMA) Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor .7 LS 316 Mix Check .8 LS 318 Practice for Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) Mix Design .9 LS 602 Sieve Analysis of Aggregates .10 LS-603 Resistance to Degradation of Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los

Angeles Abrasion Machine .11 LS-604 Relative Density and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate .12 LS-605 Relative Density and Absorption of Fine Aggregate .13 LS-629 Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate

.2 ASTM .1 D946/D946M-09a - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in

Pavement Construction .2 C 612-14 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.3 D 6752-11 Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Automatic Vacuum Sealing Method

.3 AI (Asphalt Institute) .1 MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mixes (6th Edition). .2 SP-2 Superpave Mix Design Method .3 NAPA QIS-122 Designing and Constructing SMA Mixtures

.4 AASHTO .1 T 305 14 Determination of Draindown Characteristics in Uncompacted Asphalt Mixtures .2 M 320-05 Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder .3 T 166-05 Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry

Specimens .4 T 283-03 Resistance of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures to Moisture Induced Damage .5 T 305-14(2014) Determination of Draindown Characteristics in Uncompacted Asphalt Mixtures .6 T 312-15 Standard Method of Test for Preparing and Determining the Density of Asphalt Mixture

Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION .1 Submit asphalt design mixes and testing data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE / SOURCE SAMPLING .1 Obtain materials from same source throughout. .2 At least 4 weeks prior to commencing work inform Consultant of proposed source of aggregates and

provide access for sampling. .3 At least 4 weeks prior to commencing work submit samples of following materials proposed for use:

.1 One 5 L container of asphalt cement. .4 If materials have been tested by an independent testing laboratory within previous 2 months and have

successfully passed tests equal to requirement of this specification, submit test certificates from testing laboratory showing suitability of materials for this project.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 4 degrees C or surface

is wet or frozen. .2 Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 8 C degrees below bitumen suppliers bill of

lading and not more than maximum specified temperature.

1.7 PROTECTION .1 Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until paving surface temperature has cooled below 38 C

degrees. Do not permit stationary loads on pavement until 24 hours after placement. .2 Provide access to buildings as required. Arrange paving schedule so as not to interfere with normal

use of premises

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Granular Base and Sub-base: conform to Section 31 00 00 Earthworks. .2 Asphalt:

.1 Liquid Limit, D4318-10 Maximum 25.

.2 Plasticity Index, D4318-10, Maximum 6.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

.3 Asphalt Cement: In conformance with O.P.S.S. 1150 for specific Type (Marshall Mix) and O.P.S.S. MUNI 1151 for specific Type (Superpave Mix), unless otherwise noted. Performance graded to O.P.S.S. 1101.

.4 Aggregate material to conform to the following requirements: .1 Crushed stone to gravel consisting of hard, durable, angular particles free from clay lumps,

cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials. .2 To conform to O.P.S.S. 1150 (Marshall Mix), O.P.S.S. MUNI 1151 (Superpave Mix) and O.P.S.S.

1003. .5 Regardless of compliance with specified physical requirements, fine aggregates may be accepted or

rejected on basis of past field performance. .6 Mineral Filler:

.1 Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter. In accordance with OPSS 1003.

.2 Add mineral filler when necessary to meet job mix aggregate gradation or as directed by Consultant to improve mix properties.

.7 Primer: to CAN/CGSB-16.1-M90 grade MC-70 CAN/CGSB-16.2-M90 grade SS-1.

.8 Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt to O.P.S.S. 1103.

2.2 ASPHALT PAVING MIX .1 Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly. .2 Do not change mix design without prior approval of Consultant. Should change in material source be

proposed, new job-mix formula will require approval by Consultant. .3 Binder Course: In accordance with In accordance with O.P.S.S. 1150 or O.P.S.S. MUNI 1151, Type

MDBC, to thickness indicated. .4 Wearing Course: In accordance with In accordance with O.P.S.S. 1150 or O.P.S.S. MUNI 1151, Type HL-

3 or Superpave 12.5, to thickness indicated.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS .1 Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of work. As part of the

mix design provide all testing data. .2 Submit mix designs three (3) weeks prior to scheduled paving date. .3 Submit test samples in accordance with O.P.S.S. 1101.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION, SUB-BASE AND BASE INSPECTION .1 Contractor to examine Drawings to determine where various asphalt thicknesses and mixes are

required and located. .2 Verify base conditions to requirements of Division 01. .3 Verify that compacted stabilized soil, granular base, sub-grade is dry and ready to support paving and

imposed loads. .4 Verify grades of sub-grade drains and other items in paving area for conformity with elevations and

sections before placing granular base material. .5 Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. .6 Obtain testing and approval of sub-base and base by Consultant prior to placing asphalt.

3.2 PREPARATION - PRIMER .1 Apply primer to manufacturer's written instructions and application rates. .2 Apply primer to contact surfaces of curbs and gutters.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

.3 Use clean sand to blot excess primer.

3.3 PREPARATION - TACK COAT .1 Apply tack coat to manufacturer's written instructions and application rate. .2 Apply primer to contact surfaces of curbs and gutters. .3 Coat surfaces of catch basin and manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do

not tack coat these surfaces.

3.4 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE .1 Obtain approval of base and primer from Consultant before placing asphalt. .2 Install Work in accordance with O.P.S.S. 1150 standards. .3 Minimum 120 C degrees mix temperature required when spreading. .4 Maximum 160 C degrees mix temperature permitted at any time. .5 Place asphalt within twenty-four (24) hours of applying primer or tack coat. .6 Place asphalt wear course to compacted thickness identified on Drawings. .7 Install gutter drainage grilles and manhole frames in correct position and elevation. .8 Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position.

Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. .9 Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks. .10 Compact with roller as soon as it can support roller weight without undue cracking or displacement. .11 Roller, power driven, minimum mass of 4.5 tonnes, minimum wheel width 600 mm. .12 Roll until roller marks are eliminated. Compact to density not less than 97% of density obtained with

Marshall specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM D1559-89 from samples of mix being used. .13 Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mix displacement and do not stop roller on fresh pavement. .14 Moisten roller wheels with water to prevent mix adhesion. .15 Compact mix with hot tampers or other approved equipment in areas inaccessible to roller.

3.5 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE .1 Obtain approval of base and primer from Consultant before placing asphalt. .2 Install Work in accordance with O.P.S.S. 1150 standards. .3 Minimum 120 C degrees mix temperature required when spreading. .4 Maximum 160 C degrees mix temperature permitted at any time. .5 Place asphalt binder course within twenty-four (24) hours of applying primer or tack coat. .6 Place asphalt mix only when base or previous course is dry and air temperature is above 5 C degrees. .7 Place asphalt binder course to compacted thickness identified on Drawings. .8 Place wearing course within two (2) hours of placing and compacting binder course. .9 Place asphalt wear course to compacted thickness identified on Drawings. .10 Install gutter drainage grilles and manhole frames in correct position and elevation. .11 Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position.

Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. .12 Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. .13 Compact each course with roller as soon as it can support roller weight without undue cracking or

displacement. .14 Roller, power driven, minimum mass of 4.5 tonnes, minimum wheel width 600 mm. .15 Roll until roller marks are eliminated. Compact to density not less than 97% of density obtained with

Marshall specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM D1559-89 from samples of mix being used. .16 Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mix displacement and do not stop roller on fresh pavement. .17 Moisten roller wheels with water to prevent mix adhesion.


Page 5


217102

April 2018

.18 Compact mix with hot tampers or other approved equipment in areas inaccessible to roller.

3.6 JOINTS .1 Cut bituminous course to full depth in neat lines to expose fresh vertical surfaces. Remove broken and

loose material. .2 Paint exposed vertical edge of asphaltic joints, edges of manholes & catchbasin frames, curbs and

similar items with hot asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt before placing asphalt courses. .3 Carefully place and compact hot asphaltic material against joints.

3.7 TOLERANCES .1 Flatness: Maximum variation of 6 mm measured with 3 m straight edge. .2 Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 6 mm. .3 Variation from True Elevation: Within 10 mm except at transitions required for accessible travel to

within 5 mm.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Division 01: Field inspection and testing. .2 Take and submit test samples in accordance with O.P.S.S. 1101 to Owners Testing Agency. .3 Inspection and testing of asphalt pavement will be carried out by designated testing laboratory. .4 Costs of tests will be paid by cash allowance.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for two (2) days or until

surface temperature is less than 60 degrees C140 degrees F. .2 Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until pavement surface temperature has cooled below 38

degrees C.

3.10 DEFECTIVE WORK .1 Correct irregularities which develop before completion of rolling by loosening surface mix and

removing or adding materials as required. If irregularities or defects remain after final compaction, remove surface course promptly and lay new material to form a true and even surface and compact immediately to specified density.

.2 Repair areas showing checking or hairline cracking.

END OF SECTION

32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING

Page 1


217102

April 2018

Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Concrete curbs and sidewalks.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork: Granular base and sub-base. .2 Section 32 14 13 - Precast Concrete Unit Paving: Unit pavers.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09 - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and

Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-A3000-08 - Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004

and A3005). .3 CSA-G30.18-09 - Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .4 CAN/CSA-S269.3-M92 (R2008) - Concrete Formwork. .5 CSA-W186-M1990 (R2012) - Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on admixtures, curing compounds and joint filler.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 4 degrees C40 degrees F, or surface

is wet or frozen.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 FORM MATERIALS .1 Form Materials: Wood or steel forms, profiled to suit requirements and site conditions.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS .1 Concrete Materials: In accordance with OPSS standards. .2 Cement: CAN/CSA-A3000, Normal, Grey colour. .3 Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. .4 Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: In accordance with CAN/CSA-A3000 . .5 Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. .6 Chemical Admixture: CAN/CSA-A3000, type as required to suit environmental conditions.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Curing and Seal Compound:

.1 Product: Cipadeck Cure & Seal Silane, manufactured by CPD.

2.4 CONCRETE MIX - BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA .1 Mix and deliver concrete to ASTM C94/C94M.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.2 Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with the following: .1 The concrete supplier to provide mix design and strength by trial batch. .2 The concrete supplier to provide field test criteria to achieve specified performance criteria.

.3 Provide concrete to the following criteria: .1 Compressive Strength: 32 MPa at 28 days. .2 Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.45. .3 Air Entrained: 5% to 7%.

.4 Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Consultant. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

.5 Use calcium chloride only when approved by Consultant.

.6 Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Consultant.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .1 Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review prior to

commencement of work. .2 Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with specified

requirements. .3 Test samples to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify compacted granular base is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. .2 Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

3.2 PREPARATION .1 Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. .2 Notify Consultant minimum twenty-four (24) hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.3 FORMING .1 Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. .2 Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. .3 Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE .1 Place concrete in accordance with OPSS standards. .2 Place concrete using the slip form technique. .3 Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete

placement. .4 Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction

joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

3.5 JOINTS .1 Place expansion joints at 6 m intervals. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. .2 Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. .3 Saw cut contraction joints 5 mm wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut one third (1/3) into depth

of slab.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

3.6 FINISHING .1 Sidewalk Paving: Light broom and trowel joint edges. .2 Curbs and Gutters: Light broom. .3 Direction of Texturing: Transverse / perpindicular to pavement direction. .4 Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply to

manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 6 mm in 3 m. .2 Maximum Variation From True Position: 6 mm.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI

301. .2 One (1) additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same

conditions as concrete it represents. .3 One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. .4 Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature,

and test samples taken.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK .1 Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold

temperatures, and mechanical injury. .2 Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement for seven (7) days minimum after finishing. .3 Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement until 75% design strength of concrete has been

achieved.

END OF SECTION

32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING

Page 1


217102

April 2018

Section 32 14 13 - Precast Concrete Unit Paving

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Concrete paver units. .2 Setting bed and sand joint filler. .3 Edging.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork: Preparation of subsoil and granular base and sub-base for pavers.

1.3 REFERENCES .1 ASTM C936/C936M-12 - Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide characteristics of paver unit, dimensions. .2 Samples: Submit two (2) samples of each paver size, illustrating style, size, colour range and surface

texture of units being provided.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Pavers: Conforming to the following:

.1 Type: Precast concrete

.2 Compressive strength: Minimum of 50 MPa.

.3 Freeze-thaw resistance: Maximum weight loss of 0.35% after 50 freeze-thaw cycles when totally immersed in 3% sodium chloride solution.

.4 Moisture Absorption: Maximum 5%.

.5 Nominal Size: 100 x 200 x 60 mm.

.6 Colours: Up to 2 (two) colours as later selected by the Consultant from manufacturer's standard range.

.2 Screenings for Setting Bed: Clean, hard, durable, crushed stone particles, free of clay, cementitious, organic, frozen or other deleterious materials .

.3 Sand for Joints: Clean washed fine sand to CSA A82.56M, free of clay, cementitious, organic, frozen or other deleterious materials.

.4 Edging: Formed plastic, rigid and flexible PVC components as required for curved or straight edges, "Pave Edge system as manufactured by Pave Tech Inc. c/w connectors and spikes.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION .1 Verify that substrate is level or to correct gradient, smooth, capable of supporting pavers and imposed

loads, and ready to receive work of this Section. .2 Verify gradients and elevations of substrate are correct.

32 14 13 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING

Page 2


217102

April 2018

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Install paving units to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Spread screenings setting bed evenly over prepared substrate surface to a maximum thickness of 50

mm. .3 Dampen and roller compact setting bed to level and even surface. .4 Screed and scarify top 13 mm of setting bed. .5 Place paver units in herringbone pattern, from straight reference edge. .6 Place paver units in patterns as indicated on Drawings. .7 Place edging at all edges except those abutting asphalt paving, concrete curbs or sidewalks and similar

hard surfaces. Maintain tight joints. .8 Tamp and level paver units with mechanical vibrator until units are firmly bedded, level, and to correct

elevation and gradients. Do not tamp unrestrained edges. .9 Fill spaces between pavers with sand and mechanically vibrate to compact sand in joints. .10 Sweep off excess sand.

END OF SECTION

32 31 00 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

Page 1


217102

April 2018

PART 1 - General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES .1 Fence framework, fabric, and accessories. .2 Excavation for post bases; centre drop for gates. .3 Manual gates and related hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES .1 ASTM A116-11 - Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-12 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. .3 ASTM A153/A153M-09 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. .4 [ASTM A392-11a - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.] .5 ASTM C94/C94M-13 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. .6 ASTM F567-11a - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence. .7 ASTM F1043-12 - Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain

Link Fence Framework. .8 ASTM F1083-10 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded,

for Fence Structures. .9 CAN/CGSB 138.1-96 - Fabric for Chain Link Fence. .10 CAN/CGSB 138.2-96 - Steel Framework for Chain Link Fence. .11 CAN/CGSB 138.3-96 - Installation of Chain Link Fence. .12 CAN/CGSB 138.4-96 - Gates for Chain Link Fence. .13 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09 - Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and

Standard Practices for Concrete. .14 CLFMI (Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute) - Product Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW .1 Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware. .2 Samples: If requested, submit two (2) samples of fence fabric, illustrating construction, finish and top

and bottom selvage.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Perform Work in accordance with CAN/CGSB-138.3. .2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

Section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. .3 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three (3) years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 MATERIALS .1 Framing (Steel): CAN/CGSB 138.2, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, welded construction, minimum

yield strength of 172 MPa; coating conforming to ASTM F1043, Type A on pipe exterior and interior. .2 Fabric Wire (Steel): to CAN/CGSB 138.1, Type 1 (steel), Class B, woven from galvanized wire, medium

style (9ga / 3.5mm), ASTM A392 - Grade 1 galvanizing (366g/m2), height(s) as indicated on drawings.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.3 Concrete: CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2; Sulfate Resisting Portland Cement, air entrained, 25 MPa strength at 28 days.

2.2 COMPONENTS .1 Line Posts: 48 mm diameter. .2 Corner and Terminal Posts: 89 mm. .3 Gate Posts: 114 mm diameter. .4 Top and Brace Rail: 42 mm diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled. .5 Fabric: 51 mm diamond mesh interwoven wire, top selvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage

knuckle end closed. Barbed selvages will be rejected. .6 Bottom Tension Wire: to CAN/CGSB-138.1, Table 2, single strand, galvanized wire, 5 mm ( thick, single

strand. .7 Tension bar: to ASTM A-525M, 5 x 20mm minimum galvanized steel. .8 Tension bar bands: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, 3 x 20mm galvanized steel or 5x20mm aluminum. .9 Tie Wire: to CAN/CGSB-138.1, Table 4, aluminum wire, single strand. .10 Gates: CAN/CGSB 138.4.

.1 Gate Frame: 42 mm diameter for welded fabrication.

2.3 ACCESSORIES .1 Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter to provide waterproof fit, fasten securely over posts,

set screw retainer. .2 Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; galvanized steel. .3 Gate Hardware: Fork latch with gravity drop, two (2) 180 degree, malleable iron gate hinges per leaf

and hardware for padlock, chain hook to hold gates in open position and drop bolt for securing in closed position.

2.4 FINISHES .1 Components and Fabric: Galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, 550 g/sq m coating thickness. .2 Hardware: Galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M, 550 g/sq m coating. .3 Accessories: Same finish as framing.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 GRADING .1 Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth uniform gradient

between posts. Provide clearance between bottom of fence and ground surface neither less than 30 mm nor more than 50 mm.

3.2 INSTALLATION .1 Erect fence, posts and accessories along lines indicated and in accordance with CAN/CGSB-138.3. .2 Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates to manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Excavate post holes 1200mm depth (unless otherwise noted) x 250 mm diameter for line posts and

300 mm diameter for terminal posts. Drill holes in existing bedrock or boulders as required. .4 Set gate, intermediate, terminal posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 50 mm above.

Place concrete in post holes then embed posts into concrete to minimum 600 mm depth. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. Brace to hold posts in plumb position and true to alignment and elevation until concrete has set.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

.5 Space line posts 3 m apart, measured parallel to ground surface.

.6 Install corner post where change in alignment exceeds 10°.

.7 Install end posts at end of fence and at buildings. Install gate posts on both sides of openings.

.8 Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal centre brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.

.9 Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 150 mm long rail sleeves.

.10 Install centre brace rail on corner gate leaves.

.11 Place fabric on inside of posts and rails.

.12 Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured seven (7) days.

.13 Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 30 m maximum, whichever is less.

.14 Position bottom of fabric 50 mm above finished grade.

.15 Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 380 mm on centres.

.16 Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.

.17 Install bottom tension strap wire stretched taut between terminal posts.

.18 Do not attach the hinged side of gate from building wall; provide gate posts.

.19 Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install three hinges per leaf, latch, catches, drop bolt and foot bolts and sockets.

.20 Provide concrete centre drop to footing depth and drop rod retainers at centre of double gate openings.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES .1 Maximum Variation From Plumb: 6 mm. .2 Maximum Offset From True Position: 25 mm. .3 Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines.

END OF SECTION

32 32 23 SEGMENTED CONCRETE RETAINING WALL SYSTEM

Page 1


217102

April 2018

Section 32 32 23 - Segmented concrete Retaining Wall Systems

PART 1 - General

1.1 SUMMARY .1 Work shall consist of furnishing all materials, labour, equipment and supervision for construction of a

Segmental Concrete Retaining Wall (SCRW) System in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, design, and dimensions shown on the drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metals: Railings and guards .2 Section 31 00 00 Earthwork: Granular base and backfill.

1.3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .1 Design

.1 CSA A23.4-09 Precast Concrete – Materials and Construction .2 Segmental Concrete Units

.1 ASTM C-140 Test Method for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units

.2 ASTM C-1262 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze Thaw Durability of Dry-Cast Segmental Retaining Wall Units and Related Concrete Units

.3 ASTM C-1372 Specification for Dry- Cast Segmental Retaining Wall Units

.4 ASTM D-6638 Connection Strength Between Geosynthetic Reinforcement and Segmental Concrete Units (Modular Concrete Blocks)

.5 ASTM D-6916 Shear Strength Between Segmental Concrete Units (Modular Concrete Blocks) .3 Where conflict exists between reference standards, applicable CSA standards will prevail wherever

ANSI or ASTM specifications conflict with CSA standards.

1.4 DEFINITIONS .1 Compacted Native Backfill – compacted native soil, or designated alternative, which is used as backfill

between the SCRW and Retained Soil. .2 Foundation Soil – compacted native soil that supports the Levelling Pad, Reinforced Soil Zone (where

required) and Compacted Native Backfill. .3 Geosynthetic Reinforcement - a structural element formed by a regular network of integrally

connected tensile elements with apertures of sufficient size to allow interlocking with the aggregate/soil used in the Reinforced Soil Zone, and function primarily as reinforcement of the soil mass.

.4 Gravel Fill – Free draining granular material used between (where required), and for the first 300 mm behind, the Segmental Concrete Units; used to facilitate the removal of incidental groundwater, minimize build-up of hydrostatic pressure, and increase the weight and sheer capacity of the system.

.5 Levelling Pad – A level surface, consisting of crushed stone or unreinforced concrete, which distributes the weight of the Segmental Concrete Units over a wider area of the Foundation Soil and provides a working surface during construction.

.6 Low Permeability Soil – compacted layer of soil above the Gravel Fill, Reinforced Soil Zone (where required) and Compacted Native Backfill to prevent surface water infiltration.

.7 Reinforced Soil Zone – For reinforced SCRW, the compacted imported aggregate or native soil used around the extent of the Geosynthetic Reinforcement beyond the Gravel Fill.


Page 2


217102

April 2018

.8 Retained Soil – the undisturbed soil behind the SCRW.

.9 Segmental Concrete Units –precast concrete retaining wall elements machine made from Portland cement, water, and aggregates that create the mass necessary for structural stability in a gravity SCRW, and a facing for a reinforced SCRW.

.10 Separation Geotextile - A geotextile filter installed between the SCRW and the Compacted Native Backfill or Retained Soil to protect the Subsurface Drainage System from clogging. Also required below the Low Permeability Soils (where used).

.11 Subsurface Drainage System – horizontal pipe at or near the base of Gravel Fill to facilitate water drainage.

1.5 SUBMITTALS .1 Product Data: Submit technical specifications and product data from the manufacturers for the

following: .1 Segmental Concrete Units .2 Separation Geotextile

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1 SCRW Contractor shall check all materials upon delivery to assure that the proper type, grade, color,

and certification have been received. .2 SCRW Contractor shall store and handle all materials in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations, as specified herein, and in a manner that prevents deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature change, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, UV exposure or other causes.

.3 Keep Segmental Concrete Units and Subsurface Drainage Piping off any unpaved surface using wood pallets or blocking.

.4 Stockpile aggregates on hard surfaces or geotextile to prevent contamination from site soils and sediment.

.5 SCRW Contractor shall protect the materials from damage.

.6 Separation Geotextile shall be delivered, stored and handled in accordance with ASTM D-4873.

.7 Deteriorated, damaged or contaminated materials shall not be incorporated into the work.

PART 2 - Products

2.1 SEGMENTAL CONCRETE UNITS (SCU) .1 This Section includes wall, cap, corner, and step units available as part of the selected Segmental

Concrete Unit system and shown on the drawings. .2 Segmental Concrete Unit system shall be:

.1 Product: ProterraTM System as manufactured by Oaks Concrete Products.

.2 Colour: As later selected by Consultant from standard colour range. .3 Inter-unit shear strength properties between Segmental Concrete Units shall be evaluated in

accordance with ASTM D-6916 (NCMA SRWU-2). .4 Connection strength between Segmental Concrete Units and geosynthetic reinforcement shall be

evaluated in accordance with ASTM D-6638 (NCMA SRWU-1). .5 Copings: Provide manufacturer's recommended coping to suit the specified SCU system. Colour: to

match SCU system colour. .6 Coping or Unit Adhesive: Use manufacturer's recommended adhesive product for between layers of

units and under copings as indicated in the manufacturer's recommendations and the Drawings.


Page 3


217102

April 2018

2.2 SEPARATION GEOTEXTILE .1 Geotextile filter fabric shall be minimum 4.0 oz/sy, polypropylene, needle-punched nonwoven fabric.

The physical and hydraulic properties of geotextiles shall be specified in accordance with AASHTO M288-06. .1 Mirafi 140N by TenCate or approved alternate.

2.3 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE PIPING .1 The piping shall be perforated or slotted PVC pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-3034, or

corrugated HDPE pipe manufactured in accordance with ASTM D-1248 complete with fabric sock. .2 Perforations or slots shall be sized to prevent migration of core fill gravel into the pipe. .3 All connectors and fittings shall match the piping material.

2.4 LEVELING PAD .1 The leveling pad shall be comprised of compacted granular base or non-reinforced concrete.

.1 Granular A, refer to Section 31 00 00 - Earthworks.

.2 Concrete shall satisfy criteria for Class B as defined in AAASHTO Division II, Section 8.1.2. Minimum compressive strength of 10.3 MPa.

PART 3 - Execution

3.1 EXCAVATION AND FOUNDATION SOIL PREPARATION .1 SCRW Contractor shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings in

accordance Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork. .2 Achieve compaction of native soils, granular base and sub-base as per requirements of Section 31 00

00. .3 Geotechnical Engineer shall inspect the excavation and approve prior to placement of Leveling Pad.

SCRW Contractor to proof roll Foundation Soils as directed to determine if remedial work is required. .4 Over excavation of unsuitable Foundation Soils and replacement with approved compacted fill will be

compensated as agreed upon with the Consultant. .5 Embankment excavations shall be bench cut. .6 General Contractor shall protect the SCRW work area and structure against surface water runoff at all

times by using berms, diversion ditches, temporary drains, and other measures necessary to prevent drainage to the SCRW structure.

3.2 LEVELING PAD .1 Leveling pad material shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings. .2 Leveling pad shall extend a minimum of 150mm beyond both the front and back of the lowermost

Segmental Concrete Units. .3 Where granular base is shown on the drawings for the Leveling Pad, material shall have a minimum

thickness of 150mmand shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Standard Proctor density per ASTM D-698.

.4 Where non-reinforced concrete is shown on the drawings for the Leveling Pad, material shall have a minimum thickness of50mm.

.5 Final surface of Leveling pad shall be prepared to insure full contact to the base surface of the concrete Facing Units and have a tolerance within +/- mm over a m span.


Page 4


217102

April 2018

3.3 SEGMENTAL CONCRETE RETAINING WALL .1 Place Separation Geotextile as required by the design drawings. .2 First course of Segmental Concrete Units shall be placed on the Leveling Pad at the appropriate line

and grade. Alignment and level shall be checked in all directions. .3 Ensure that all units are in full contact with the Leveling Pad and properly seated. .4 Ensure the front faces of the Segmental Concrete Units are side-by-side. Do not leave gaps between

adjacent units along the exposed face(s). Layout of corners and curves shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.5 Check each course for level and alignment. Adjust units as necessary to maintain level and alignment prior to proceeding with each additional course.

.6 Place the Subsurface Drainage System within the Unit Fill at the elevations shown on the design drawings. Ensure proper slope to create gravity flow of water to outside of the SCRW system and verify there are no low spots or dips in the pipes. Provide daylight outlets at each low point, and at 15m intervals along the wall through either the face of the wall, or around the ends of the wall, where required.

.7 Place Gravel Fill between the Segmental Concrete Units as required. Fill to top of units, then compact or rod Gravel Fill to insure all voids are completely filled.

.8 Maximum stacked vertical height of wall units, prior to, Gravel Fill, Reinforced Soil (where required) and Compacted Native Backfill placement and compaction, shall not exceed one course.

.9 Compacted Native Backfill shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 150mm where walk behind compaction equipment is used, or 50mm where heavy (i.e. ride on) compaction equipment is used. Lift thickness shall be decreased to achieve the required density as required. Fill completely and level from Segmental Concrete Units to Retained Soil.

.10 Compacted Native Backfill shall be compacted to 98% of the maximum density respectively as determined by ASTM D-698. The moisture content of the material prior to and during compaction shall be uniformly distributed throughout each layer and shall be within +/- 2% of the optimal moisture content.

.11 Only lightweight hand operated equipment shall be allowed within 1.0 m from the rear of the Segmental Concrete Units.

.12 For subsequent courses, brush top surface of underlying Segmental Concrete Units clean. Set next units squarely and verify there is no rocking on the underlying row. Ensure the interlock between units is engaged by pulling the units forward. Provide adhesive as required by manufacturer's recommendations and approved design details.

.13 At the end of each day's operation, the SCRW Contractor shall slope the last lift of Retained Soil away from the wall units to direct runoff away from wall face. The SCRW Contractor shall not allow surface runoff from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site.

.14 Cap units shall be secured with an adhesive as per manufacturer's recommendations. Cut cap units as necessary to obtain proper fit.

END OF SECTION

Phelps Public School 15010 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112

Piotrowski Consultants Ltd.

North Bay, Ontario May 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL

1. This section covers items common to all sections of Division 15 and is supplementary to requirements of Division 1.

2. Division 1, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here.

3. Coordinate all requirements with General Contractor.

1.2. CODE OF STANDARDS

1. Do complete installation in compliance with latest editions and all amendments of the following Codes and Standards. Where conflicts in requirements occur, the higher standard shall apply:

1. ASHRAE

2. SMACNA

3. CSA

4. Ontario Building Code

5. All governing municipal requirements

6. ULC

1.3. DEFINITIONS

1. “Provide” means supply and install.

2. “Approved” means approved in writing by Consultant.

3. “Consultant” means designated qualified professional engineer acting as representative of Owner for monitoring of work.

4. “Manual” means Operations and Maintenance manual.

1.4. CARE, OPERATION, START-UP AND INSTRUCTION TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation mechanical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.

2. Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn over to Owner's




staff for regular operation.

3. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care and operation.

4. Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion of instruction, turn three manuals over to the Owner.

5. Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by and final copies deposited with Consultant before final inspection.

6. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

1.5. PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, FEES AND INSPECTIONS

1. Submit to the Building Department the necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination prior to commencement of work to obtain a building permit.

2. Submit Notice of Project to Ministry of Labour.

3. Contractor shall be responsible to pay associated fees.

4. Notify Consultant of changes required by Building Department prior to making changes.

5. Notify Consultant upon completion of work.

1.6. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION

1. Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to minimize disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference from building structure or other equipment.

2. Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated "lifetime" bearings.

3. Pipe drain lines to drains.

4. Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.

5. Provide equipment commissioning and preliminary balancing and confirm the proper operation of all equipment and related systems.

1.7. RESPONSIBILITY FOR TRIAL USAGE

1. Obtain written permission to start and test permanent equipment and systems prior to acceptance by Consultant.




2. Consultant may use ventilating equipment and systems for testing.

3. Protect equipment and systems' openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials during test usage.

1.8. ELECTRICAL

1. Division 15 shall supply and install motors, controls and control wiring, supply starters, switches and relays, for all motor driven equipment under Division 15. Starters, switches and relays shall be handed over to Division 16 for installation and wiring.

2. Electrical equipment not supplied by Division 15 is listed on the drawings or elsewhere in the Specification for quality of material and workmanship.

3. Safety disconnect switches shall be supplied for each rotating equipment unless within viewing distance for motor control but max 6 m (20') supplied by Division 15 and installed by Division 16.

4. Wiring and controls for connections below 50 V, which are related to control systems are the responsibility of Division 15. Refer to Division 16 for quality of materials and workmanship.

1. Control cables, type LVT, soft annealed copper conductors with thermoplastic insulation and colour coding. Installation in EMT conduit.

2. Two conductors parallel with an overall thermoplastic jacket; three or more conductors twisted with an overall thermoplastic jacket.

3. Cable to be installed in EMT conduit or to be plenum rated FT6 type.

1.9. MOTORS

1. Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.

2. If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery of installation of any equipment, install an acceptable motor for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed.

3. Motors under 373 W (1/2 HP) speed as indicated, continuous duty high efficiency, built in overload protection, resilient mount, single phase, 120 V unless otherwise specified or indicated.

4. Motors 373 W (1/2 HP) to 150 kW (200 HP) T frame, to or exceeding the current Ontario Hydro Motor Efficiency Levels and be listed in the current Ontario Hydro Motor Efficiency Levels Guide as tested to CSA C390M 1985 or IEEE 112B and approved under the Canadian Safety Code, speed as indicated, continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 40°C (72°F), 3 phase, 208 V or 600 V unless otherwise specified or indicated.

5. Provide a suitable manual or magnetic starter for each piece of equipment supplied under this Division.




6. Provide safety disconnect switches for the above equipment.

7. Division 16 will install all starters, disconnects and line voltage control devices and perform all wiring under supervision of this Division.

1.10. BELT DRIVES

1. Fit reinforced belts in sheaves matched to drive. Multiple belts to be matched set.

2. Use cast iron or steel sheaves secured to shafts with removable keys unless otherwise specified.

3. For motors up to 7.5 kW (10 HP) standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves, having plus or minus 10% range. Use mid position of range for specified r/min. Use fixed sheaves for motors 7.6 kW (10 HP) and over. Replace sheaves during balancing if required.

4. Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keep overhung loads within manufacturers design requirements on prime mover shafts.

5. Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre line adjustment.

1.11. DRAIN VALVES

1. Locate at low points and at section isolating valves unless otherwise specified.

2. Minimum NPS 3/4 unless otherwise specified: bronze, with hose end male thread and complete with cap and chain.

1.12. SLEEVES

1. Provide pipe sleeves at points where pipes pass through masonry or concrete.

2. Provide sleeves of minimum 1.0 mm (20 GA) galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints or use PVC pipe in non rated walls.

3. Use cast iron or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at mid-point.

1. Through foundation walls.

2. Where sleeve penetrates fire rated wall or floor ceiling assembly.

4. Sizes:

1. Provide 5 mm (1/4") clearance all around, between sleeves and pipes or between sleeve and insulation.

2. Where piping passes below footings, provide min clearance of 50 mm (2") between sleeve and pipe. Fill void with elastic, water proof material. Backfill up to underside of footing with concrete of same strength as footing.




5. Fill voids around pipes. Remove plastic sleeves.

1. Caulk between sleeve & pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors with oakum that lead between sleeve and pipe.

2. Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between insulation and sleeve or between pipe and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic.

3. Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve.

4. Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.

6. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity assembly in compliance with OBC. Submit shop drawings and details on all products.

7. Temporarily plug all openings during construction.

1.13. ESCUTCHEONS AND PLATES

1. Provide on pipes passing through finished walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.

2. Use split type chrome plated brass, with set screws for ceiling or wall mounting.

3. Inside diameter shall fit around finished pipe. Outside diameter shall cover opening or sleeve.

4. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheons or plates shall clear sleeve extension.

5. Secure to pipe or finished surface but not insulation.

1.14. TESTS

1. Provide the following supplementary requirements to tests specified:

1. Give 48 h notice of date when tests will be made.

2. Do not insulate or conceal work until tested and approved.

3. Conduct tests in presence of Consultant.

4. Bear costs including retesting and make good.

5. Pipe pressure:

1. Test to applicable codes.

1.15. PAINTING




1. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

2. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up.

1.16. SPECIAL TOOLS

1. Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers.

1.17. DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS

1. Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

2. Provide felt or rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metal contact.

1.18. CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. All cutting and patching shall be by Division 2, coordinated by Division 15. Coordinate with other trades. Notify Structural Engineer before cutting any structural members and obtain written permission.

1.19. EXISTING SYSTEMS

1. Before submitting tender price verify on job site location of all accessible existing systems affecting execution of this contract. Difficulties arising during construction will not be considered as grounds for additional payment.

2. Where work involves breaking into or connecting to existing systems, carry out work at times directed by governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to pedestrian traffic.

3. Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Consultant for any shut down or closure of active service or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.

4. Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Consultant and confirm findings in writing.

1.20. INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation mechanical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes or modification equipment must be under terms of guarantee.

2. Training plans to be submitted prior to the execution of the training. At a minimum, training plans to include the list of systems and equipment which are to be trained on. Instructor’s name and qualifications and allotted time for training. Training plans to be reviewed and approved by Owner and Consultant prior to commencement of training.




3. Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn over to Owner's staff for regular operation.



1.21. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Provide two (2) paper copies and one electronic “PDF” on CD or USB stick of Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals, in accordance to the following and Section 01780 “Closeout Submittals”.

2. Mechanical Operation and Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Engineer’s office 60-days prior to the completion of the Contract.

3. Manuals to be bound in hard cover neatly labeled: “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS”.

4. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labeled and tabbed dividers between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:

1. Section I – General

2. Section II – Piping Systems

3. Section III – Heating and Ventilation

4. Section IV – Water Balancing Report

5. The following information shall be contained within the sections:

1. SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant, Engineers, Construction Manager, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written guarantees for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving number, valve location, normal valve position, and purpose of valve. A framed copy of valve directory to be hung in Mechanical Room. Equipment lists and certificates shall be provided. Certificates shall be signed and sealed by the appropriate suppliers. All major equipment including but not limited to air handling units are to be inspected by the manufacturer to ensure the equipment has been installed in accordance with their recommendations.

2. SECTION II, III and IV: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests for pumping system. A list giving name, address and telephone number of all suppliers. A copy of all approved Shop Drawings. Copies of warranties.

3. SECTION IV: Provide complete water balance report for hydronic heating elements, heating pumps. Provide copies of all pressure tests completed on the systems.

6. MAINTENANCE MATRIX




1. A maintenance matrix is to be provided in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The matrix shall indicate each piece of equipment and the required maintenance tasks and the frequency at which they are to be carried out.

1.22. OWNER OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

1. The existing building may be occupied during normal occupancy hours.

2. Provide temporary protection for all finishes, appliances or equipment in the existing building.

3. Protect and maintain existing boiler and electrical rooms operations during the work.

1.23. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. Site records:

1. One set to be kept on site and all changes to be recorded on daily basis. At the completion of the project, all changes shall be transferred to clean set, signed and passed to the Consultant.

2. Make these drawings available for reference purposes and to inspection at all times.

2. Submit 2 copies of as-built marked up prints with final TAB report.

3. As-built drawings must be delivered before system acceptance.

1.24. SPARE PARTS

1. One (1) set of belts from any motor driven mechanical components.

2. One (1) set of each type and size of valve.

3. Leave on site and coordinate with the Owner.

1.25. TRAINING

1. Provide minimum of one 6 hour training session on systems.

2. Include for training in Fall to winterize system.

END OF SECTION 15010

Phelps Public School 15140 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. ASME B31.1-2012, (SI), Power Piping, (SI Edition).

2. MSS-SP-58-2009, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Indicate on manufacturer's catalogue literature the following:

1. Upper attachment.

2. Middle attachment.

3. Pipe attachment.

4. Riser clamps.

5. Shields and saddles.

6. Sway braces.

1.4. MAINTENANCE DATA

1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS-SP-58.

2. Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not




in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.

2.2. UPPER ATTACHMENTS

1. Concrete:

1. Anchors for existing concrete roof structure, heavy duty anchors Hilti HSL.

2. Steel beam (bottom flange):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 28 or 29. ULC listed.

3. Steel beam (top):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: malleable iron "top of beam" C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 19. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: steel jaw, hook rod with nut, spring washer and plain washer, to MSS-SP-58, type 25. ULC listed.

4. Steel joist:

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under: steel washer plate with double locking nuts.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping: steel washer plates with double locking nut, carbon steel clevis and malleable iron socket.

5. Steel channel or angle (bottom):

1. Cold piping NPS 2 and under; malleable iron C clamp to MSS-SP-58, type 23. ULC listed.

2. Cold piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger and all hot piping; universal channel clamp. ULC listed.

6. Wood trusses and joists.

1. Hold piping NPS2 and under. Secure angle iron 32 x 32 x 3 mm (1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 3/16") on top of joist or bottom chord trusses. Space min. 2 joints. Use rod hanger with locking nut and clevis hanger.

2. Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 and larger. Secure angle iron 50 x 50 x 4 mm on top of joists or bottom chord of trusses. Span min. 4 members. Use rod hangers with locking nut and clevis hanger.

2.3. MIDDLE ATTACHMENT (ROD)




1. Carbon steel threaded rod black finish.

2.4. PIPE ATTACHMENT

1. Cold piping, steel or cast iron: hot piping steel, with less than 25 mm, 1" horizontal movement; hot piping, steel, with more than 300 mm, 12" middle attachment rod length: adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. ULC listed.

2. Cold copper piping; hot copper piping with less than 25 mm, 1" horizontal movement; hot copper piping with more than 300 mm, 12" middle attachment rod length: adjustable clevis to MSS-SP-58, type 1. Copper plated.

3. Suspended hot piping, steel and copper, with horizontal movement in excess of 25 mm, 1"; hot steel piping with middle attachment rod 300 mm, 12" or less; pipe roller to MSS-SP-58, type 43.

4. Bottom supported hot piping, steel and copper: pipe roller stand to MSS-SP-58, type 45.

2.5. RISER CLAMPS

1. Steel or cast iron pipe: black carbon steel to MSS-SP-58, type 42. ULC listed.

2. Copper pipe: carbon steel copper finished to MSS-SP-58, type 42.

2.6. SADDLES AND SHIELDS

1. Cold piping NPS 1-1/4 and over: protection shield with high density insulation under shield with uninterrupted vapour barrier.

2. Hot piping NPS 1-1/4 and over: protective saddle with insulation under saddle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. HANGER SPACING

1. Spacing and middle attachment rod diameter as specified in paragraphs below or as in table below, whichever is more stringent.

1. Plumbing piping: most stringent requirements of Ontario Building Code, or authority having jurisdiction.

2. Fire protection: to applicable fire code.

3. Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 5' 1.5 m

4. Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one hanger at joints.




5. Within 12" of each horizontal elbow.

Pipe Rod Maximum Spacing Size Diameter Steel Cooper (Nominal) NPS 1/2 10 mm 3/8" 1.8m 6' 5' 1.5m NPS 3/4, 1 10 mm 3/8" 2.1m 7' 6' 1.8m NPS 1-1/4 10 mm 3/8" 2.1m 7' 8' 2.4m NPS 1-1/2 10 mm 3/8" 2.7m 9' 8' 2.4m NPS 2 10 mm 3/8" 3.0m 10' 9' 2.7m NPS 2-1/2 10 mm 3/8" 3.0m 10' 10' 3.0m NPS 3 to 4 10 mm 3/8" 4.6m 15' 12' 3.6m

NPS 6 19 mm 3/4" 5.1 m 17' --

3.2. HANGER INSTALLATION

1. Offset hanger so that rod is vertical in operating position.

2. Adjust hangers to equalize load.


Phelps Public School 15190 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and IDENTIFICATION Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CGSB 1-GP-60M, Enamel, Interior, Gloss, Alkyd Type.

2. CGSB 24-GP-3a Identification and Classification of Piping Systems.

1.3. SAMPLES

1. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Submit samples and lists of proposed wording for approval before engraving.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. MANUFACTURERS NAMEPLATES

1. Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened complete with raised or recessed letters.

2. Indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.

2.2. SYSTEM NAMEPLATES

1. Colour:

1. Hazardous: red letters, white background.

2. Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes).

2. Construction:

1. 3 mm thick, laminated plastic or white anodized aluminum, matte finish, square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core.

3. Sizes:




1. Conform to following table:

Size Dimensions No. of Letter # (mm) (in) Lines Height (mm) (in) 1 10 x 50 3/8 x 2 1 3 1/8 2 13 x 75 1/2 x 3 1 5 1/4 3 13 x 75 1/2 x 3 2 3 1/8 4 20 x 100 3/4 x 4 1 8 3/8 5 20 x 200 3/4 x 8 1 8 3/8 6 20 x 100 3/4 x 4 2 5 1/4 7 25 x 125 1 x 5 1 12 1/2 8 25 x 125 1 x 5 2 8 3/8 9 35 x 200 1-1/4 x 8 1 20 3/4

2. Use average of 25 letters/numbers (maximum) per nameplate.

3. Use size #6 for terminal cabinets and control panels.

4. Use size #9 for equipment in mechanical rooms.

5. Facilities Inspection Program (FIP) identification:

1. General: use system of Main Identifier, Source Identifier, Destination Identifier.

2. Equipment and Mechanical Rooms: Main Identifier: size #9; Source and Destination Identifiers: size #5.

3. Elsewhere: Sizes as appropriate.

2.3. PIPING

1. General

1. To CGSB 24-GP-3a.

2. Identify medium by lettered legend, classification by primary and secondary colours, direction of flow by arrows.

2. Sizes:

1. Legend: block capitals to following table:

Outside Dia. of Size of Pipe or Insulation Letters mm in mm in 30 1-1/4 13 1/2 50 2 19 3/4 150 6 32 1-1/4 250 7 63 2-1/2 Over 250 8 88 3




2. Primary colour bands:

1. At valves and fittings: 460 mm, 18" long.

2. Elsewhere: 1.8 m, 42" long.

3. Secondary colour bands: 50 mm, 2" wide, 75 mm, 3" in from one end of primary colour band.

3. Arrows:

1. Outside diameter of pipe/insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm, 6" long x 50 mm, 2" high.

2. Outside diameter of pipe/insulation less than 75 mm, 3": 100 mm, 4" long x 50 mm, 2" high.

3. Use double headed arrows where flow is reversible.

3. Material:

1. Paint: to CGSB 1-GP-60M.

2. Legend markers, arrow colour bands: plastic coated cloth material with protective overcoating and waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of 150°C (300°F). Apply to prepared surfaces. Wrap tape around pipe or pipe covering with ends overlapping one (1) pipe diameter.

3. Waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags: for pipes and tubing 3/4" nominal and smaller.

4. Acceptable material: Brady

4. Colours:

1. Where not covered by table below, submit legend, primary and secondary classification colours to Consultant for approval.

5. Table:

1. Pipe and valve identification.

Pipe Marker Valve Tag Primary Secondary Legend Legend Colour Colour Hot Water Htg H.W.H.S Green None Supply Hot Water Htg H.W.H.R. Green None Return Cold Water C.W. Green None Hot Water H.W. Green None




Recirc. Hot Water R.H.W. Green None

2. Legend and arrows:

1. Black or white to contrast with primary colour.

2. Fire protection: white on red background.

3. Fire protection system:

1. Exposed piping identify only.

4. Low voltage control wiring installed by Division 15.

2.4. DUCTWORK

1. 2" high black stencilled letters and directional flow arrows 6" long x 2" high.

2.5. VALVES AND CONTROLLERS

1. Brass tags with 1/2" stamped code lettering and numbers filled with black paint.

2. Furnish Consultant with six identification flow diagrams of approved size for each system. Include valve tag schedule, designating number, service, function and location of each tagged item and normal operating position of valves.

2.6. CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls and sensors.

2. Inscription to identify function and fail-safe position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. GENERAL

1. Do identification work in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a except where specified otherwise.

2. Provide ULC and/or CSA registration plates, as required by respective agency.

3. Identify systems and equipment to conform to PWC, FIP.

3.2. LOCATION OF NAMEPLATES




1. In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading from operating floor and to properly identify equipment and/or system.

2. Provide stand-offs for nameplates on hot surfaces and insulated surfaces.

3. Do not insulate or paint over plates.

3.3. PIPING

1. Locations:

1. On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, mechanical room, and tunnel so that at least one is clearly visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas or walking aisles and not at more than 15 m, 50' intervals.

2. Adjacent to all changes in direction.

3. At least once in each small room through which piping passes.

4. On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.

5. On both sides of any separation such as walls, floors and partitions.

6. Where piping is concealed in pipe chase, ceiling space, or other confined space, at entry and leaving points and adjacent to each access opening.

7. At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.

8. At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves. Where this is not possible, place identification as close to valve as possible, preferably on upstream side.

9. Legend to be easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and all readily accessible points.

10. Plane of legend to be approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight with consideration of operating positions, lighting conditions, reduced visibility of colour or legends caused by dust and dirt and risk of physical damage.

3.4. DUCTWORK

1. Stencil over final finish only.

2. Locations of ductwork identification:

1. On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, so that at least one is clearly visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas or walking isles and not at more than 15 m, 50' intervals.

2. Adjacent to all changes in direction.




3. At least once in each small room through which ductwork passes.

4. On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.

5. On both sides of any separation such as walls, floors and partitions.

6. Where ductwork is concealed in duct chase, or other confined space, at entry and leaving points and adjacent to each access opening.

7. At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.

8. At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled dampers. Where this is not possible, place identification as close to damper as possible, preferably on upstream side.

9. Legend to be easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and all readily accessible points.

10. Plane of legend to be approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight with consideration of operating positions, lighting conditions, reduced visibility of colour or legends caused by dust and dirt and risk of physical damage.

11. Beside each access door.

3.5. VALVES AND CONTROLLERS

1. Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers except at plumbing fixtures and radiation.

2. Install one copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in frame with non-glare glass where directed by Consultant. Provide one copy in each operating and maintenance instruction manual.

3. Consecutively number valves system.


Phelps Public School 15260 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. Do thermal insulation in accordance with ACNBC, ASTM E96-66(1972) and ASTM C411-61 (1975).

2. Fire hazard rating:

1. Meet NFPA 90A-2002, NFPA 225-1984 and CAN4-S102-M83 for all components of insulation system.

1.3. DEFINITIONS

1. “CONCEALED” - insulated mechanical services in chases, furred spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.

2. “EXPOSED” - will mean “not concealed” as defined herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. FORMED FIBROUS GLASS TO 200°C

1. Application: insulation system for piping, valves, heat exchangers, headers, fittings, etc. maximum temperature 200°C. On domestic hot water and recirculating piping, fittings and all hydronic heating hot water systems.

2. Materials:

1. CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping, including foilcraft laminate packet with open mesh fibre scrim reinforcing.

2. Acceptable materials: Knauff; Fibreglass Rigid-Wrap pipe insulation.

3. Thickness:

1. Domestic hot water and recirculating lines – located in conditioned spaces:

Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal Up to NPS 1 1/4" 25 mm (1")

NPS 1 1/2" and larger 40 mm (1 1/2") Run-outs to fixtures

For max. of 2.4 m (8') 25 mm (1")




2. Hydronic hot water heating media temperature up to 200°F/93°C:

Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal

Run-outs Up to 3.7 m (12') 38 mm (1 1/2") NPS 3/4" to 1 1/4" 38 mm (1 1/2") NPS 1 1/2” to 8” 50 mm (2”)

2.2. FORMED FIBROUS GLASS WITH V.B. -14 TO 37°C

1. Application: insulation system for piping, valves, heat exchangers, headers, fittings, etc., for temperature range - 14 to 37°C. On domestic cold water, rain water leaders, above grade storm and condensate lines.

Media Temperature 41 to 56°F / 5 to 13°C Line Size Nominal Thickness Nominal Up to NPS 1 1/4” 13 mm (1/2") NPS 1 1/2 and over 25 mm (1")

2. Materials:

1. CGSB 51-GP-9M, rigid mineral fibre sleeving for piping, and CGBS 51-GP-52M vapour barrier jacket. Complete with factory applied foil laminate, reinforced with open mesh fibre scrim.

2.3. FASTENINGS

1. Self-adhesive tape and 100% coverage lagging adhesives.

1. Self-adhesive tape rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke development.

2. For vapour barrier:

1. Quick-setting adhesive for joints and lamps sealing of vapour barriers. Flame spread 10 smoke development 0.

2.4. JACKETS

1. Fire retardant PVC jackets.

1. Apply in exposed areas (mechanical, kitchen/home economics class, storage rooms): compact, firm ULC listed, fire rated, heavy plain weave cotton fabric at 220g/m

2 (0.83 oz/sq. ft.)

2. On concealed valves and fittings use ULC listed, fire rated, plain weave cotton fabric at 120 g/m

2 (0.38 oz/Sq. Ft.)




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. APPLICATION

1. Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Consultant. Insulation and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during application of any finish. Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein.

2. On piping with insulation and vapour barrier, install high density calcium silicate black under hanger shield and metal saddle. Maintain integrity of vapour barrier over full length of pipe without interruption at sleeves, fittings and supports.

3.2. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.

2. Perform insulation work using qualified insulation applicators, in accordance with latest trade application methods and to the Consultant’s approval.

3. Work to begin only when building is enclosed preventing insulation from getting wet due to elements such as rain, snow, construction, etc. All damaged or wet insulation to be replaced.

4. All piping (Section 15260) and ductwork (Section 15270) insulation to be continuous except at fire barriers.

5. Preformed: sectional up to NPS 12, sectional or curved segmented above NPS 12.

6. Multi-layered: staggered butt joint construction.

7. Vertical pipe over NPS 3: insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest pipe fitting. Thereafter, locate on 3 m, 15' centres.

8. Expansion joints in insulation: terminate single layer and each layer of multiple layers in straight cut at intervals recommended by manufacturer. Leave void of 25 mm, 1" between terminations. Pack void lightly with flexible mineral insulation.

9. Seal and finish exposed ends and other terminations with insulating cement.

10. Expansion joints in piping: provide for adequate movement of expansion joint without damage to insulation or finishes.

11. Orifice plate mounting flanges, flanges and unions at equipment, expansion joints, valves, other components requiring regular maintenance.

12. Insulation is not required for:

1. Chrome plated piping, valves and fittings.

3.3. FASTENINGS




1. Secure pipe insulation by tape at each end and centre of each section, but not greater than 1 m (36") on centres.


Phelps Public School 15270 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. ASTM C411-11, Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation.

2. CAN/ULC-S102-10, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

3. ANSI/NFPA 90A-2012, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, Installation of.

4. ANSI/NFPA 90B-2012, Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

5. CGSB 51-GP-10M-76, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Block or Board, for Ducting, Machinery and Boilers.

6. CGSB 51-GP-11M-76, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery and Boilers.

7. CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89, Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation.

1.4. DEFINITIONS

1. For purposes of this section:

1. "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in hung ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred spaces.

2. "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL




1. All components of insulation system to have maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.

2. Materials to be tested in accordance with ASTM C411.

2.2. D-2 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET WITH VAPOUR BARRIER MINUS 40 TO PLUS 150°F

1. Application: on round or oval ducting, either cold or dual temperature.

1. Exhaust air ductwork minimum lengths of 10’, or as shown on the drawings.

2. Or as indicated.

2. Material:

1. CGSB 51-GP-11M, mineral fiber blanket; CGSB 51-GP-52M for vapour barrier.

2. Acceptable material: Fibreglass MDS 103

3. Thickness: 25 mm, 1"

2.3. D-4 MINERAL FIBER RIGID WITH VAPOUR BARRIER TO 65°C

1. Application: on cold or dual temperature rectangular ducting.

1. Exhaust air ductwork minimum lengths of 10’, or as shown on the drawings.

2. Or as indicated.

2. Material:

1. CGSB 51-GP-10M, rigid mineral fiber board; CGSB 51-GP-52M vapour barrier, jacket and facing material.

2. Acceptable material: Fibreglass MDS 101

3. Thickness:

1. One 25 mm, 1" layer on: exhaust air ducts.

2.4. FASTENINGS

1. Tape: self adhesive, 100 mm, 4" wide, aluminum, ULC labelled for less than 25 flame spread and less than 50 smoke developed.

2. Contact adhesive: quick-setting.

3. Lap seal adhesive: quick-setting for joints and lap sealing of vapour barriers.

4. Pins.




1. Weld pins 4 mm, 3/16" diameter, with 40 mm, 1 1/2" diameter head for installation through the insulation. Length to suit thickness of insulation.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1. APPLICATION

1. Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Consultant. Insulation and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during application of any finish. Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes to manufacturer's recommendations and as specified.

2. Vapour barriers and insulation to be unbroken over full length of duct or surface, without penetration for hangers, standing duct seams and without interruption at sleeves and supports.

3. Use stand-offs for all duct mounted control accessories.

3.2. INSTALLATION

1. General:

1. Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.

2. Perform insulation work using qualified insulation applicators, in accordance with latest trade application methods and to the Consultant’s approval.

3. Work to begin only when building is enclosed preventing insulation from getting wet due to elements such as rain, snow, construction, etc. All damaged or wet insulation to be replaced.

4. All ductwork (Section 15270) insulation to be continuous except at fire barriers.

5. Adhere and seal vapour barrier using vapour seal adhesives.

6. Stagger longitudinal and horizontal joints, on multilayered insulation.

2. Mechanical fastenings:

1. On rectangular ducts, use 50% coverage of insulating cement and weld pins at not more than 200 mm, 8" centres, but not less than 2 rows per side and bottom.


Phelps Public School 15413 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - Electrical Upgrades CAST IRON AND COPPER Project Number: 6112 Page 1



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. Do the work in accordance with Ontario Building Code and local authority having jurisdiction except where specified otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

1. Above ground sanitary and vent Type DWV to: ASTM B306-13 up to 2 1/2".

1. Fittings.

1. Cast brass: to CSA B158.1-1976.

2. Wrought copper: to ANSI B16.29-2012.

2. Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32-08, type 50A.

2.2. CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

1. Above ground sanitary storm and vent: to CAN3-B70-M86 3" and larger.

1. Joints.

1. Mechanical joints.

1. Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel clamps.

2. Cast iron couplings.

1. Complete with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel bolts and nuts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

Phelps Public School 15413 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - Electrical Upgrades CAST IRON AND COPPER Project Number: 6112 Page 2



1. Install piping parallel and close to walls and ceilings to conserve headroom and space, and to grade indicated.

2. Coordinate with the Building Inspector to witness tests and inspect work.


Phelps Public School 15513 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and HYDRONIC SYSTEMS - STEEL PIPING, Electrical Upgrades VALVES AND FITTINGS Project Number: 6112 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. ASME B18.2.1-2012, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws.

2. ASTM A47M/A47M-99 (2009), Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

3. ASTM A53/A53M-12, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

4. ASTM A536-84(R2009), Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

5. ASTM B61-08, Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.

6. ASTM B62-09, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

7. MSS-SP-70-2011, Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

8. MSS-SP-71-2011, Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

9. MSS-SP-80-2013, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

10. MSS-SP-85-2011, Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS


2. Indicate on manufacturer’s catalogue literature the following: - valves.


1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.5. SPARE PARTS

1. Furnish following spare parts:

1. Valve seats: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.




2. Discs: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.

3. Stem packing: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.

4. Valve handles: two of each size.

5. Gaskets for flanges: one for every ten flanges.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. PIPE

1. Steel pipe: to ASTM A53, Grade B.

1. To NPS 8, Schedule 40.

2.2. PIPE JOINTS

1. NPS 2 and under: screwed fittings with teflon tape, Pro Press by Viega.

2. Pipe thread taper.

3. Bolts and nuts: to ANSI B18.2.1.

2.3. FITTINGS

1. Screwed fittings: malleable iron, Class 150.

2. Unions: malleable iron, to ASTM A47M.

2.4. GATE VALVES

1. NPS 2 and under, screwed:

1. Rising stem: to MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, solid wedge disc.

2. Acceptable Products: Jenkins 810; Crane 428; Red-White 293; NIBCO T124; Kitz 24.

2.5. BALL VALVES

1. NPS 2 and under:

1. Bronze body, screwed ends, TFE seal, bronze hard chrome plated ball, 4 MPa WOG.




2. Acceptable Material: Watts 6000, Red-White 5044A, NIBCO TFP600; Kitz 58.

2.6. GLOBE VALVES

1. NPS 2 and under, screwed:

1. To MSS SP-80, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet, renewable composition disc suitable for service.

2. Lockshield handles: where indicated.

3. Acceptable Products: Jenkins Fig 106B, Crane 7, Red-White 221, NIBCO T235-Y; Kitz 9.

2.7. SILENT CHECK VALVES

1. NPS 2 and under:

1. To ASTM B62, Class 125, 860 kPa cast steel, wafer style, brass seat rings, brass inner valve, stainless steel spring (heavy duty spring in vertical down flow application).

2. Acceptable Material: CPV No. 36.


3.1. PIPING INSTALLATION

1. Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install concealed pipes close to building structure to keep furring space to minimum. Install to conserve headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping wherever practical.

3. Slope piping in direction of drainage and for positive venting.

4. Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage or positive venting.

5. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves and fittings.

6. Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and outside, before and after assembly.

7. Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.

8. Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains if branch line is no larger than half the size




of main. Hole saw or drill and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line prior to welding saddle.

3.2. FLUSHING AND CLEANING

1. Flush after pressure test for a minimum of 8 h.

2. Fill with solution of water and non-foaming, phosphate-free detergent 3% solution by weight. Circulate for minimum of 72 h.

3. Drain and flush for 8 h. Remove strainer screen/basket and clean.

4. Refill system with clean water and circulate min 4 h.

5. Drain and flush for 8 h. Remove strainer screen/basket and clean. Re-install after obtaining Consultant's approval.

3.3. FILLING OF SYSTEM

1. Refill system with clean water as applicable.

3.4. VALVES

1. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise by Consultant.

2. Install ball valves at all branch take-offs and to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated.

3. Install globe valves for balancing and in by-pass around control valves.

3.5. TESTING

1. Test system in accordance with Section 15010 - Mechanical General Requirements.

3.6. BALANCING

1. Install flow balancing valves as indicated. Acceptable Product: Tour and Anderson.

2. Balance water systems to within +/-5% of design output.


Phelps Public School 15515 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. ASME Section VIII for Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1983.

2. ASTM A47M-90, Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

3. ASTM A278M-85(1991), Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures up to 345°C.

4. ASTM A516/516M-90, Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service.

5. ASTM A536-84, Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

6. ASTM B62-93, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

7. CSA B51-03, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.

1.3. SHOP DRAWINGS


2. Indicate on manufacturer’s catalogue literature: expansion tanks air vents separators valves strainers.


1. Provide maintenance date for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. AUTOMATIC AIR VENT

1. Standard float vent: brass body and NPS 1/8 connection and rated at 690 kPa (100 psi) working pressure.

2. Industrial float vent: cast iron body and NPS 1/2 connection and rated at 860 kPa (125 psi)




working pressure.

3. Float: solid material suitable for 115°C (240°F) working temperature.

2.2. AIR SEPARATOR IN-LINE

1. Working pressure: 860 kPa (125 psi).

2. Size: same as line.

3. Acceptable Material: Armstrong, B&G, Spirovent.

2.3. COMBINATION AIR SEPARATORS / STRAINERS

1. Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code, for 860 kPa (125 psi) operating pressure, with stainless steel integral strainer with 3/16" perforations, tangential inlet and outlet connections, and internal stainless steel air collector tube.

2.4. COMBINATION LOW PRESSURE RELIEF AND REDUCING VALVES

1. Adjustable pressure setting: 206 kPa (30 psi) relief, 55 to 172 kPa (8 TO 25 psi) reducing.

2. Low inlet pressure check valve.

3. Removable strainer.

4. Acceptable Material: Watts, Zurn-Wilkins.

2.5. PIPE LINE STRAINER

1. NPS 1/2 to 2: bronze body to ASTM B62, screwed connections.

2. Sizes: as indicated.

3. Blowdown connection: NPS 1 complete with ball valve and plug.

4. Screen: stainless steel with perforated size of 1/16”.

5. Working pressure: 860 kPa (125 psi).

2.6. BALANCING VALVES

1. NPS 1/2 to 2 bronze body to ASTM B62, screwed connections.

2. Sized as indicated.

3. Metering ports incorporating Nordel EPT check valves on both sides of seat.




4. Y pattern, equal for percentage globe style, designed either presetting with a balance schedule or for proportional balancing.

5. Positive shut off with no drip soft seat.

6. ¼” NPT tapped drain port on both sides of seat.

7. Four 360° adjustment turns of the handwheel with micrometer type indicator and hidden memory.

8. Preformed insulation.

9. Acceptable Material: Tour and Anderson.


3.1. GENERAL

1. Install as indicated and to manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Pipe drains and blow off connections to nearest drain.

3. Maintain proper clearance to permit service and maintenance.

4. Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Consultants directive.

5. Refer to manufacturer's installation drawings.

6. Check that all openings for appurtenances and equipment operating weight conform to shop drawings.

3.2. STRAINERS

1. Install in horizontal or down flow lines.

2. Ensure clearance for removal of basket.

3. Install ahead of each pump, water meter.

4. Install ahead of each automatic control valve larger than NPS 1, pressure reducing valve and as indicated.

3.3. AIR VENTS

1. Install at high points of systems.

2. Install gate valve on automatic air vent inlet. Run discharge to nearest drain or service sink.




3. Install at each heating coil, glycol coil and chilled water coil.

3.4. PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVES

1. Pipe discharge to nearest drain.

3.5. BALANCING VALVES

1. Handwheel and metering ports shall not be located on bottom of valve to prevent sediment deposits. Setting must be readable without the use of mirrors or special tools.


Phelps Public School 15516 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, ANCHORS, Electrical Upgrades JOINTS AND GUIDES Project Number: 6112 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit product data and technical information.

2. Indicate for each item as applicable:

1. Manufacturer, model number, line content, pressure and temperature rating.

2. Movement handled; axial, lateral, angular and the amounts of each.

3. Nominal size and dimensions including details of construction and assembly.


1. Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. FLEXIBLE METAL HOSE CONNECTION

1. Inner Hose: stainless steel corrugated.

2. Braided wire mesh ss outer jacket.

3. Size and end connection: to suit.

4. Complete unit suitable for working pressure for 1040 kPa (150 psi) and working temperature of 230°C (450°F).

5. Capacity to absorb 6" transverse movement with length across flexible portion not less than 6 diameter.

6. Standard of Acceptance: Flexonics; United.

2.2. EXPANSION COMPENSATOR

1. Stainless steel bellows, steel stroud and fittings.

2. Fittings: male thread ends or flange/flange.

Phelps Public School 15516 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, ANCHORS, Electrical Upgrades JOINTS AND GUIDES Project Number: 6112 Page 2



3. Size and end connection: to suit.

4. Complete unit suitable for working pressure for 1040 kPa (150 psi) and working temperature of 230°C (450°F).

5. Capacity to absorb:

a) 2" linear movement – thread ends.

6. Standard of Acceptance: Flexonics Model H (up to 2” dia)


3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Provide flexible connections – hot water piping to all equipment subject to vibration such as coils, re-heat coils.

3. Provide flexible connection to:

1. Discharge, suction on pumps as indicated

2. Hot water/glycol to re-heat coils

4. Install pipe anchors and guides as indicated and recommended by manufacturer. Anchors to withstand 150% of axial thrust. Piping anchors – structural steel angles, channels, or plates secured to building structure at locations as shown. Provide two guides on each side of and adjacent to joint. Guides to be pipe rolls or structural steel shapes secured to building structure. Install pipe rollers on each pipe structure support assembly.


Phelps Public School 15831 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and CONVECTORS AND FINNED TUBE RADIATION Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL


1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

.2 Indicate:

.1 Equipment, capacity, piping and connections.

.2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method installation with proposed structural steel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes.

.3 Special enclosures.

1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 -

Submittals.

1.4 SAMPLES

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

.2 Submit 4 ft. length sample enclosure showing method of securing to structure and connection

to adjacent length of enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

.1 Provide factory built internal damper at enclosure air outlet grilles for each convection type

heating unit not thermostatically controlled. See schedules on drawings.

.2 Finish cabinet with factory applied baked finish coat - colour to be verified.

.3 Provide for noiseless expansion of all components.

.4 Provide access doors for valves and vents.

.5 Radiation to give output as indicated based on 82.2°C (180°F) E.W.T., 7°C (20°F) temperature drop and 21°C (70°F) E.A.T.

2.2 FINNED TUBE RADIATION

.1 Heating elements: NPS 1 1/4 as indicated on schedules seamless copper tubing, 1.6 mm (16

GA) minimum wall thickness, mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins, 100 x 100 mm (4" x 4") nominal, 158 fins per meter (48 fins per ft.) suitable for sweat fittings.




.2 Element hangers: plastic lined cradle type providing unrestricted longitudinal movement on

enclosure brackets. Space brackets 900 mm (36") centres maximum. .3 Standard enclosures: 1.3 mm (18 GA) thick steel flat top or flat top complete with aluminum

bar grille on front and components for wall-to-wall or complete with die formed end caps having no knock-outs, with inside corners, outside corners, as indicated. Provide full length channel and sealer strip at top of wall edge. Height as indicated. Joints and filler pieces to be flush with cabinet. Support rigidly top and bottom, on wall mounted brackets. Joints and filler pieces to be clear of grilles located to provide easy access to valves and vents. Provide access doors to valves, vents, and controls. Finish cabinet with factory baked enamel finish - colour to be verified. Touch up scratches on site.

.4 Special enclosures: as indicated.

.5 Dimensions for enclosures: measure site conditions. Do not scale from drawing.

.6 Provide for noiseless expansion of all components.

.7 Acceptable Material: Trane; Slant Fin; Rittling; Sterling; Sigma; Rosemex.

2.3 CONTROLS

.1 Motorized valve with on-off actuator, 24 V motor, spring return, valve body, to be controlled by

thermostat with matching transformer. Belimo B Series or approved equal. To be provided by Division 15. Valve with ΔP max 2 PSI. Thermostat to be electronic 7/24 programmable - battery less memory support.

.2 Self generating valve equal to Danfoss Model RA or Brankman, sized as required. Location

as shown on the drawings. Minimum close-off pressure 17 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install according to piping layout. Provide for pipe movement during normal operation.

.2 Maintain proper clearance around equipment to permit performance of service maintenance.

Check final location with Consultant if different from that indicated prior to installation.

.3 Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Consultants directive.

.4 Refer to manufacturer's installation drawings.

.5 Check that openings from appurtenances and operating weight conform to shop drawings.

.6 If accessories, ancillaries, are received knocked down, check assembly with Consultant.

.7 Valves:

.1 Install valves with steams upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise.




.2 Install isolating gate valves and lockshield globe balancing on each unit.

.8 Venting:

.1 Install screwdriver vent on cabinet convector, terminating flush with surface of

cabinet.

.2 Install automatic air vent with cock on continuous wall convectors.

.3 Install standard air vent with cock on continuous wall convectors.

.9 Clean all finned tubes and comb straight.

.10 Install where indicated, NPS 1 1/4" all copper flexible expansion compensator. END OF SECTION 15831

Phelps Public School 15832 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and UNIT HEATERS Electrical Upgrades Page 1

Project Number: 6112



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL


1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

.2 Indicate:

.1 Equipment, capacity, piping and connections.

.2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of

installation with proposed structural steel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes.

1.3 MAINTENANCE

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 -

Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

.1 Cabinet: type as indicated, 1.6 mm (16 GA) thick steel with rounded exposed corners and

edges, keyed access panels, glass fibre insulation and integral air outlet and inlet.

.2 Finish with factory baked enamel finish - colour to be verified.

.3 Special cabinet front panels: as indicated.

.4 Coils: aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. hydrostatically test to 1 MPa (150 psi).

.5 Fans: centrifugal double width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven,

sleeve bearings, resilient mounted.

.6 Motor: multi-speed, tapped wound permanent split capacitor type with sleeve bearings, built-in thermal overload protection and resilient rubber isolation mounting.

.7 Capacity: as indicated.

.8 Control:

.1 3 speed or solid state PSC variable speed, on-off switch, manual operated with

integral overloads internally mounted, remote electronic programmable 24/7 thermostat.

.2 Low limit aquastat strapped on to steam or hot water heating return set to prevent

Phelps Public School 15832 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and UNIT HEATERS Electrical Upgrades Page 2

Project Number: 6112



fan operating below 27°C (80°F).

.9 Acceptable material: Trane; Slant Fin; Rittling; Sterling; Sigma; Rosemex; Engineered Air.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Install in accordance with piping layout and reviewed shop drawings.

.3 Provide double swing pipe joints as indicated.

.4 Check final location with Consultant if different from that indicated prior to installation. Should

deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Consultant's directive.

.5 Hot water units: for each unit, install gate valve on inlet and balancing valve on outlet of each unit in accordance with Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialities. Install drain valve at low point. Install automatic air vent at high point.

.6 Clean finned tubes and comb straight.

.7 Provide supplementary suspension steel as required.

.8 Before acceptance, set discharge patterns and fan speeds to suit requirements.


Phelps Public School 15860 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and COMMERCIAL FANS Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. REFERENCES

1. AMCA 99-10, Standards Handbook.

2. AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

3. AMCA 300-08, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

4. AMCA 301-06, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

5. CGSB 1-GP-181M, Coating, Zinc Rich, Organic, Ready Mixed.

6. ASHRAE Standard 51-2007 -- Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating (ANSI/ASHRAE Approved) (ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-07)

7. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operaitons.



2. Product data to include fan curves and sound rating data, showing point of operation.

3. Indicate the following: motors, wheels, bearings, shafts and enclosures.

1.3. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

1. Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.4. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

1. Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout Item 1.7 - Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

1. Spare parts to include:

1. Matched sets of belts.

2. Furnish list of individual manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual.

1.5. MANUFACTURED ITEMS




1. Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.

2. Provide confirmation of testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. FANS - GENERAL

1. Capacity, total static pressure, revolutions per minute, power, model, size, sound power data and as indicated.

2. Sound ratings: comply with AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Association) 301, tested to AMCA 300. Unit shall bear AMCA certified sound rating seal.

3. Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99.

4. Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with ANSI/AMCA 210, and ANSI/ASHRAE 51. Unit shall bear AMCA certified rating seal, except for propeller fans smaller than 12" diameter.

5. Motors: for use with variable speed controllers where indicated.

6. Motors: sizes as indicated.

7. Accessories and hardware: matched sets of V-belt drives, adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards, coupling guards, fan inlet outlet safety screens, outlet dampers and vanes as indicated.

8. Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer.

9. Scroll casing drains: as indicated.

10. Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubes where bearings are not easily accessible.

11. Provide minimum 18” high roof curbs for all roof mounted fans, unless otherwise specified.

12. Flexible connections: to Section 15911 - Duct Accessories.

2.2. CABINET FANS

1. Single or multiple wheel DWDI centrifugal fans with motor and V-belt drive, selected in accordance with requirements for centrifugal fans.

2. Arranged with not less than 0.75 wheel diameter clearance between fan inlet and plenum wall.




3. Factory fabricated casing of zinc coated or phosphorus treated steel of 1.6 mm thickness, reinforced and braced for rigidity.

4. Removable panels for access to internal parts.

5. Internally lined cabinet with 50 mm thick rigid acoustic insulation.

6. Expanded metal mesh over insulation on floor.

2.3. ROOF EXHAUSTERS

1. Centrifugal fan units, belt driven, with low silhouette aluminum housings, complete with resilient mounted motor and fan, ½” mesh, 5/64" dia. aluminum birdscreen, automatic gasketted backdraft dampers, disconnect switch within fan housing, continuous curb gaskets, stainless steel securing bolts and screws and sound insulating 18" high curbs where indicated. Hinge curb plate for access to internals for maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings supplied by manufacturer.

2. Install fan restraining snubbers as indicated.

3. Flexible connections shall not be in tension during running.

4. Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance.


Phelps Public School 15891 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and DUCTWORK, METALLIC, LOW PRESSURE - Electrical Upgrades TO 500 PA Project Number: 6112 Page 1



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with:

1. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1995.

2. SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985.

3. ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals, and Systems Volumes.



2. Indicate following:

1. Sealants

2. Tape

3. Proprietary Joints

1.4. CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS

1. Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. CLASSIFICATION

1. Ductwork classification as follows:

Maximum SMACNA Pressure Seal Pa "WG Class 500 2 B 250 1 C




125 0.5 C

2.2. SEAL CLASSIFICATION

1. Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and connections made airtight with sealant and tape.

2. Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with sealant tape or combination thereof.

3. Class C: transverse joints and connections or made air tight with gaskets, sealant tape or combination thereof. Longitudinal seams unsealed.

4. Unsealed seams and joints.

2.3. SEALANT

1. Sealant: water based polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30°C to plus 93°C.

1. Acceptable material: Duro-Dyne DWN/water based, 3M Fastbond 900.

2.4. TAPE

1. Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mm (2") wide.

1. Acceptable material: Duro-Dyne

2.5. FITTINGS

1. Fabrication: to SMACNA.

2. Radiused elbows: standard radius and or short radius with single thickness turning vanes.

3. Square elbows: to 460 mm (18") with single thickness turning vanes.

4. Square elbows: over 460 mm (18") with double thickness turning vanes.

5. Main supply duct branches with splitter damper.

6. Sub branch duct with 45° entry and balancing damper on branch or sub branch duct with square connection, volume extractor and branch duct balancing damper.

7. Transitions:

1. Diverging: 20° maximum included angle.

2. Converging: 30° maximum included angle.




8. Offsets: square elbows or full radiused elbows.

9. Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area. Maximum included angles as for transitions.

2.6. FIRESTOPPING

1. Retaining angles all around duct, on both sides of fire separation.

2. Firestopping material and installation must not distort duct.

2.7. GALVANIZED STEEL

1. Lock forming quality: to ASTM A525M-86, Z90 zinc coating.

2. Thickness: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

3. Fabrication: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.

4. Joints: to ASHRAE and SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint.

1. Acceptable material: Duct-Mate

2.8. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. Strap hangers: of same material as duct, but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct.

2. Hanger configuration: to ASHRAE and SMACNA. Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger 20".

3. Hangers: galvanized steel angle with black steel rods to ASHRAE and SMACNA.


3.1. GENERAL

1. Install ducts in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA.

2. Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. Insulate strap hangers 100 mm (4") beyond insulated duct.

3. Support risers in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA.

4. Install breakaway joints in ductwork on each side of fire separation.

3.2. HANGERS




1. Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.

2. Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.

3. Hanger spacing: in accordance with ASHRAE.

3.3. SEALING AND TAPING

1. Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of 1 coat of sealant to manufacturer’s recommendations.


Phelps Public School 15893 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and FLEXIBLE DUCTS Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Do work in accordance with the following standards except where specified otherwise:

1. CAN/ULC S110-13 for fire tests for air ducts.

2. UL 181-2013 for factory made air ducts and connectors.

3. NFPA 90A-2012 for installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems.

4. NFPA 90B-2012 for installation of warm air heating and air conditioning systems.

5. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 1995.


1. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

2. Indicate the following:

1. Thermal properties.

2. Friction loss.

3. Acoustical loss.

4. Leakage.

5. Fire rating.

1.4. CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS

1. Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.

1.5. SAMPLES

1. Submit samples with product data of each different type of flexible duct being used in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.

Phelps Public School 15893 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and FLEXIBLE DUCTS Electrical Upgrades Page 2 Project Number: 6112



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. Factory fabricated.

2. Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00.

3. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

2.2. METALLIC - UNINSULATED

1. Spiral wound flexible aluminum.

2. Performance:

1. Minimum working pressure: 2500 Pa (10"WG)

2. Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.

3. Acceptable material: Flexmaster triple lock.

2.3. METALLIC - INSULATED

1. Spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied flexible glass fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and aluminum jacket.

2. Performance:

1. Minimum working pressure: 2500 Pa (10" WG)

2. Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.

3. Acceptable material: Flexmaster


3.1. DUCT INSTALLATION

1. Install where indicated and in accordance with SMACNA.

2. Support in accordance with SMACNA.

3. Maximum length of flexible duct: 1.8 m, 6' for diffuser / grille duct connection.


Phelps Public School 15990 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) Electrical Upgrades Page 1 Project Number: 6112



PART 1 - TAB AGENCY

1. General:

1. The basic testing and balancing shall be provided by Division 15 and in accordance with this Section.

2. The independent TAB Agency employed and paid by Division 15 will be providing the final testing and balancing.


2. Quality assurance:

1. TAB to be performed to standards of ASHRAE.

3. Co-ordination:

1. Co-ordinate all work specified in this Section.

2. Provide all facilities required by TAB Agency in order to carry out work of this Section.

4. Adequacy of work for TAB:

1. TAB Agency to review contract documents before work is started and confirm in writing to Consultant adequacy of provisions for TAB and all other aspects of installation pertinent to TAB.

2. Division 15 shall provide equipment commissioning and preliminary balancing and confirm the proper operation of all systems.

5. List of TAB Agencies:

1. ABG Air Balance Group (416) 283-0637

2. Aerodynamics Inspecting Consultants Ltd. (905) 625-4388 3. Design Test Balance

(905) 886-6513 4. AirPlus (416) 298-6874

PART 2 - GENERAL

1. TAB: means to test, adjust and balance all systems to perform in accordance with Contract Documents.




2. Follow start-up procedures as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

3. Special start-up procedures may be specified elsewhere.

4. Notify Consultant 7 days prior to start of TAB.

5. Operate all systems to permit TAB to be performed.

6. TAB to apply to systems, equipment and related controls specified in Division 15.

7. Reference organization standards:

1. Do TAB over entire operating range in accordance with most stringent conditions of this specification and standard of following organization.

8. Alternate season testing to be provided by TAB Contractor where applicable.

9. TAB Contractor to inspect site during construction in order to assure that all balancing devices are installed properly and in pre-selected locations.

10. Mechanical contractor to provide the TAB contractor with all related approved shop drawings and change notices.

11. Start TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:

1. Installation of ceilings, doors, windows and other construction affecting TAB.

2. Application of sealing, caulking and weatherstripping.

3. All pressure, leakage and other tests specified elsewhere in Division 15 completed.

4. All provisions for TAB are installed and operational.

12. Start-up, verification for proper, safe and normal operation of mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.

2. Air Systems:

1. Filters in place and in clean condition.

2. Duct systems clean of debris.

3. Air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances.

4. Correct fan rotation.

5. Fire and volume dampers in place and open.

6. Coil fins cleaned and combed.




7. Access doors closed and duct end caps in place.

8. All outlets installed and connected.

13. Accuracy tolerances:

1. Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:

1. HVAC systems: Plus 5%; minus 5%.

2. As original tolerances.

3. Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.

2. Instrument calibration: to be in accordance with TAB referenced organization standard, but within 3 months of commencement of TAB.

14. Submittals prior to commencement of TAB:

1. Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB.

2. Proposed check lists and report forms.

3. List of instrumentation, including details and certificates of calibration.

15. Report:

1. Format to be in accordance with TAB referenced organization standard, but using SI units.

2. Report to include as built full system schematics showing results of TAB.

3. Submit, prior to formal submission of TAB reports, for checking and approval by Consultant, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include:

1. Details of instruments used.

2. Details of TAB procedures employed.

3. Calculations procedures.

4. Summaries.

4. Submit 3 copies of TAB reports, each in "D" ring binders, complete with index tabs for verification and approval of Consultant.

16. Verification:

1. Reported measurements shall be subject to verification by Consultant. Provide instrumentation and manpower to verify results of up to 30% of all reported measurements. Number and location of verified measurements to be at discretion of Consultant.




2. Bear costs to repeat TAB, as required, to satisfaction of Consultant.

1. Settings: lock and permanently mark settings as required by reference standard.

2. Completion: TAB to be considered complete only when final reports are approved by Consultant.

PART 3 - HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

1. General: measurements as required by referenced standards, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Measurements:

1. Flow

2. Pressure

3. Temperature

4. RPM

5. Electrical power

1. Voltage 2. Current draw.

2. Location of equipment measurements.

1. Inlet and outlet of each:

1. Fin radiation/heating elements 2. Other auxiliary equipment.

3. Location of system measurements at:

1. Supply and return of each primary and secondary loop of following hydronic systems:

1. Heating water.

4. Accuracy:

1. Plus 5%, minus 5% of design values

2. Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values

5. Reports to be done as per Section 2.8.12.


Phelps Public School 16010 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 9

Piotrowski Consultants Ltd. North Bay, Ontario May 2018

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


2. This Section covers items common to Sections of Division 16. This Section supplements requirements of Division 1.

3. Coordinate all requirements with general contractor.

1.2. SCOPE OF WORK

1. The scope of work for this project includes: electrical distribution upgrades.

2. Electrical contractor shall provide all required equipment, wiring, connections, etc., as required to provide the electrical distribution upgrades described in the documents.

3. Electrical contractor shall verify site conditions prior to submitting tender price, and shall carry all costs for work described in the documents.

4. Electrical contractor shall site verify as-built condition of all existing breaker and wire sizes that are being replaced / reconnected and report on any discrepancies to the engineer. This site review shall be done prior to ordering new distribution equipment.

5. The school shall be shut down for a six week period to complete the work.

6. Upon award of the contract, the electrical contractor shall provide a tentative schedule.

7. During the summer break, work can be conducted throughout the school during the daytime hours, as well as after hours and on weekends. Once school resumes, work during daytime hours will be limited to service spaces only. Where work has to be done in public or student areas after school has resumed, this work must be completed after hours and on weekends. Electrical contractor shall plan accordingly and carry all associated costs.

1.3. CODES AND STANDARDS

1. In this document, all references to Code numbers shall mean “Latest Edition”.

2. Do complete installation in accordance with Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

3. Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1-12 except where specified otherwise.

4. Comply with all CSA and inspection Authority Bulletins in force at time of Tender.

5. Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.1-10 except where specified otherwise.



6. Abbreviations for electrical terms: to CSA Z85-1983.

7. Where requirements of this specification exceed those of above mentioned standards, this specification shall govern.

1.4. DEFINITIONS

1. “Provide” means supply and install.

2. “Approved” means approved in writing by Consultant.

3. “Inspection Authority” means Electrical Safety Authority.

4. “Supply Authority” means Hydro One.

5. “Consultant” means designated qualified professional engineer acting as representative of Owner for monitoring of work.

6. “Manual” means Operations and Maintenance manual.

7. “OESC” means latest edition of Ontario Electrical Safety Code

1.5. CARE, OPERATION, START-UP AND INSTRUCTION TO OWNERS

1. Provide certified personnel to instruct Owner of operation of electrical equipment. Provide maintenance specialist personnel to instruct on maintenance and adjustment of electrical equipment and any changes or modification of equipment must be under terms of guarantee.

2. Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn over to Owner's staff for regular operation.

3. Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with all aspects of its care and operation.



1.6. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. Site records:

1. One set to be kept on site and all changes to be recorded on daily basis. At the completion of the project, all changes shall be transferred to clean set, signed and passed to the Consultant.

2. Make these drawings available for reference purposes and to inspection at all times.



2. As-built drawings must be delivered before system acceptance.

1.7. VOLTAGE RATINGS

1. Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235-83 (R2006).

2. Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard. Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment.

1.8. PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTION

1. Submit to Inspection Authority and Supply Authority necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination and approval prior to commencement of work.

2. Consultant will provide drawings and specifications required by Inspection Authority and Supply Authority at no cost.

3. Submit to the Building Department the necessary number of drawings and specifications for examination prior to commencement of work to obtain a building permit.

4. Submit Notice of Project to Ministry of Labour.

5. Pay associated fees and obtain all permits required for the performance of the work.

6. Notify Consultant of changes required by Inspection Authority or Building Department prior to making changes.

7. Furnish Certificates of Acceptance from Inspection Authority on completion of work to Consultant.

1.9. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1. Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1.

2. Equipment and material to be CSA certified. Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA certified, obtain special approval from Inspection Authority.

3. Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

1.10. FINISHES

1. Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated from ferrous metals.

2. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up.



3. Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint.

4. Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.

1.11. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows:

2. Nameplates:

1. Lamacoid 3 mm (1/8") thick plastic engraving sheet, white face, black core, mechanically attached with self tapping screws. For emergency power circuits, use a red face and black core.

NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50 mm (3/8 x 2") 1 line 3 mm (1/8") high letters Size 2 12 x 70 mm (1/2 x 3") 1 line 5 mm (1/4") high letters Size 3 12 x 70 mm (1/2 x 3") 2 lines 3 mm (1/8") high letters Size 4 20 x 90 mm (3/4 x 4") 1 line 8 mm (3/8") high letters Size 5 20 x 90 mm (3/4 x 4") 2 lines 5 mm (1/4") high letters Size 6 25 x 100 mm (1" x 4") 1 line 12 mm (1/2") high letters Size 7 25 x 100 mm (1" x 4") 2 lines 6 mm (1/4") high letters

3. Labels:

1. Embossed plastic labels with 6 mm (1/4") high letters unless specified otherwise.

4. Wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Consultant prior to manufacture.

5. Allow for average of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate and label.

6. Identification to be English.

7. Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.

8. Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage.

9. Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage.

1.12. WIRING IDENTIFICATION

1. Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.

2. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.



3. Colour code: to CSA C22.1.

4. Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

1.13. CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

1. Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.

2. Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m intervals.

3. Colours: 25 mm (1") wide prime colour and 20 mm (3/4") wide auxiliary colour.

PRIME AUXILIARY up to 250 V yellow up to 600 V yellow green up to 5 kV yellow blue up to 15 kV yellow red Telephone green Other communication systems green blue Fire alarm red Emergency red blue Voice Other security systems red yellow

1.14. WIRING TERMINATIONS

1. Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.

1.15. MANUFACTURERS AND CSA LABELS

1. Ensure that manufacturer’s registration plates are properly affixed to all apparatus showing the size, name of equipment, serial number, and all information usually provided, including voltage, cycle, phase and the name and address of the manufacturer.

2. Do not paint over registration plates or approved labels. Leave openings through insulation for viewing the plates. Contractors or sub-contractors nameplate not acceptable.

1.16. WARNING SIGNS

1. As specified and to meet requirements of Inspection Authority and Consultant.

1.17. SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS



1. Provide single line electrical diagrams under plexiglass in glazed frames as follows:

1. Electrical distribution system: locate in main electrical room.

2. Drawings: 600 x 600 mm (24" x 24") minimum size.

1.18. MOUNTING HEIGHTS

1. Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise.

2. If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

3. Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.

1. Panelboards to top of trim: 1800 mm (72”)

2. Emergency lighting heads: 2300 mm (90") unless ceiling mounted

1.19. LOAD BALANCE

1. Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance. Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes.

2. Submit, at completion of work, report listing phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load. State hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

1.20. SLEEVES

1. Provide pipe sleeves at points where conduits (53 mm and larger) pass through masonry or concrete.

2. Provide sleeves of minimum 1.0 mm (20 GA) galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints.

3. Use cast iron or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at mid-point.

1. Through foundation walls.

2. Where sleeve penetrates fire rated wall or floor ceiling assembly.

4. Sizes:

1. Provide 5 mm (1/4") clearance all around, between sleeves and conduits.

5. Fill voids around pipes. Remove plastic sleeves.

1. Caulk between sleeve & conduit in foundation walls and below grade floors with



oakum that lead between sleeve and pipe.

2. Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between conduit and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic.

3. Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.

6. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, maintain fire rating integrity assembly in compliance with OBC. Submit shop drawings and details on all products prior to commencing work.

7. Temporarily plug all openings during construction.

1.21. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. All electrical work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians or apprentices as per the conditions of the Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification. Employees registered in a provincial apprentices program shall be permitted, under the direct supervision of a qualified licensed electrician, to perform specific tasks – the activities permitted shall be determined based on the level of training attained and the demonstration of ability to perform specific duties.

2. The work of this division to be carried out by a contractor who holds a valid Master Electrical contractor license as issued by the Province that the work is being constructed.

3. Conduct and pay for following tests:

1. Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing.

2. Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.

3. Emergency Lighting

4. Furnish manufacturer’s certificate or letter confirming the entire installation as it pertains to each system has been installed to manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Insulation resistance testing.

1. Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument.

2. Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument.

3. Check resistance to ground before energizing.

6. Carry out tests in presence of Consultant.

7. Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.

8. Submit test results for Consultant's review.



1.22. DEMOLITION

1. Disconnect and make safe electrical equipment and services as required on site.

2. Be responsible for demolition and removal of electrical equipment and services designated on drawings for removal and as required by work unless specified otherwise under other divisions.

3. Electrical work being removed by other division shall be carried out under direction of this division. Do all disconnecting prior to authorizing removal.

1.23. FIREPROOFING

1. Where cables or conduits pass through floors and fire rated walls, pack space between wiring and sleeve full with firestopping system to CAN 4-S115.

2. Where cable trays pass through fire rated walls, pack space between the tray / wiring and the wall with intumescent fire-stop cushion style fire stopping to CAN 4-S115.

1.24. CUTTING, PATCHING AND FINISHING

1. All cutting, patching and finishing for electrical work shall be by this Section. Obtain approval before cutting any structural members. Upon removal of all conduit, wiring, light fixtures, equipment, etc., patch all holes and match existing finishes.

1.25. COORDINATION WITH EXISTING UTILITIES

1. Before commencing any Work, the Contractor shall determine the locations of all underground utilities and structures indicated in or inferable from the Contract Documents, or that are inferable from an inspection of the Place of the Work.

2. All existing utilities are to be maintained and protected for the length of construction.

3. Contractor to notify consultant if any conflicts arise and allow for minimum 48 hours for consultants review.

1.26. EXISTING SYSTEMS

1. Before submitting tender price verify on job site location of all accessible existing electrical systems affecting execution of this contract. Difficulties arising during construction will not be considered as grounds for additional payment.

2. Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Consultant for any shut down or closure of active service or facility. Adhere to approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.

3. Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Consultant and confirm findings in writing.



1.27. OWNER OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE

1. The existing building will be unoccupied for six weeks to complete the work.

2. Provide temporary protection for all finishes, appliances or equipment in the existing building.


Phelps Public School 16111 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS Electrical Upgrades AND CONDUIT FITTINGS Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. LOCATION OF CONDUIT

1. Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are in diagrammatic form only.

2. All conduits under floor slab shall be zoned in groups and run in as straight a line as possible.

1.3. REFERENCES

1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

1. CSA C22.2 No. 18-98 (R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, and Fittings and Associated Hardware.

2. CSA C22.2 No. 45.2-08, Rigid Metal Conduit.

3. CSA C22.2 No. 56-04 (R2009), Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

4. CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical Metallic Tubing.

5. CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-06 (R2011), Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.

6. CSA C22.2 No. 227.3-05 (R2010), Flexible Non-metallic Tubing.

1.4. WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1.

2. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.

3. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

4. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. CONDUITS



1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): with steel couplings, sized as indicated.

2. Rigid PVC conduit, sized as indicated.

3. Rigid metal conduit: galvanized steel threaded conduit, sized as indicated.

4. Epoxy coated conduit: with zinc coating and corrosion resistant epoxy finish inside and outside.

5. Flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit, sized as indicated.

6. Flexible PVC conduit, sized as indicated.

2.2. CONDUIT FASTENINGS

1. One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm (2") and smaller. Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm (2").

2. Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.

3. Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 3 m (9') o/c.

4. 6 mm dia threaded rods to support suspended channels.

2.3. CONDUIT FITTINGS

1. Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.

2. Fittings to be suitable sized for conduit used.

3. Fittings used for EMT to be steel, not cast.

4. Factory "ells" where 90° bends are required for 25 mm (1") and larger conduits.

2.4. EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT

1. Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 100 or 200 mm linear expansion.

2. Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection in all directions.

3. Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.

2.5. FISH CORD

1. Polypropylene.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass.

2. Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in unfinished areas.

3. Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit in areas subject to mechanical injury such as shops, loading docks etc.

4. Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.

5. Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) above 2.4 m not subject to mechanical injury.

6. Use rigid PVC conduit for installation underground and in slabs.

7. Use flexible metal conduit for final connection to devices in ceiling space max. length 3 m.

8. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connection to a vibrating piece of equipment.

9. Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.

10. Mechanically bend steel conduit over 21 mm diameter.

11. All unterminated conduit ends to be reamed and protected by insulating bushings.

12. Install fish cord in empty conduits and all conduits 53 mm and greater.

13. Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked section. Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.

14. Run 2 - 27 mm (1") spare conduits up to ceiling space and 2 - 27 mm (1") spare conduits down to ceiling space from each flush panel. Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm (6" x 6" x 4") junction boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab, terminate each conduit in flush concrete surface type box.

15. Dry conduits out before installing wire.

16. Use water tight fittings at connections to taps or sides of sprinkler proof equipment or seal with approved sealant.

3.2. SURFACE CONDUITS

1. Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

2. Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1500 mm clearance.



3. Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.

4. Group conduits wherever possible on suspended channels.

5. Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.

6. Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm (3") parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm (1") at crossovers.

7. All exposed conduits in areas other than service spaces are to be painted to match existing finishes.

3.3. CONCEALED CONDUITS

1. Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

2. Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.


Phelps Public School 16122 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and WIRES AND CABLES 0 - 1000 V Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED SECTIONS


2. Section 16151 – Wire and Box Connections – 0 – 1000V.

1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.2 No. 0.3-09, Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables.

2. CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 131-07 (R2012), Type TECK 90 cable.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1.


3. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. GENERAL

1. All conductors to be copper, unless otherwise noted.

2.2. BUILDING WIRES

1. All conductors to be copper, unless otherwise noted.

2. Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG for power and # 16 AWG for controls and fire alarm.

3. Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 600 V insulation of chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material type RW90, or with thermoplastic insulation and nylon



jacket, type T-90 nylon, rated at 600 V.

4. All outdoor circuit conductors, including service entrance conductors to be type RWU90, unless otherwise noted.

5. Wire and conduit sizes shown are based on RW75 XLPE and are minimum sizes. Contractor is responsible for wire and conduit sized for other approved wires.

6. Conductors shall be colour coded. Conductors size 10 AWG and smaller shall have colour impregnated into insulation at time of manufacture.

1. Colour code wiring for 120 / 208 Volt equipment as follows

1. Phase conductors: Red, Black, Blue

2. Neutral conductors: White

3. Bonding to ground: Green

4. Isolated bonding conductor: Green with Yellow stripe

2. Colour code wiring for 347 / 600 Volt equipment as follows:

1. Phase conductors: Orange, Yellow, Brown

2. Neutral conductors: White

3. Bonding to Ground: Green

2.3. ARMOURED CABLES

1. Conductors insulated copper sizes as indicated, minimum wire size #12 AWG.

2. Type: AC90.

3. Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip.

4. Connectors: to suit.

5. Fastenings:

1. One hole steel straps to secure surface cables 25 mm and smaller. Two hole steel straps for cables larger than 25 mm.

2. Channel type supports for two or more cables at 1500 mm centres.

3. Threaded rods: 6 mm dia. To support suspended channels.

6. Approved compression type lugs accurately sized to allow bolted connections at each cable end.



7. All wiring shall be concealed in floor slabs, walls, ceiling and furred spaces. AC90 armoured cable may be used only for drops to fixtures, maximum length 3 m in concealed ceiling spaces, or drops to receptacles in GWB partitions, maximum length 4.5 m. Otherwise cables shall be in EMT conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES

1. Install wiring in conduit in accordance with Section 16111, unless otherwise noted.

2. Use type RW90 where required by Ontario Electrical Safety Code, for all panelboard feeders and for all conductors sized 250 MCM and larger.

3. Use type RW90 or T-90 for branch circuit wiring unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG. For 15A, 120V branch circuit home runs which exceed 23 m length shall be minimum No. 10 AWG, and minimum No. 8 AWG for runs which exceed 36 m. For 20A, 120V branch circuit home runs which exceed 17 m in length shall be minimum No. 10 AWG, and minimum No. 8 AWG for runs which exceed 27 m. Where existing wiring is re-used, minimum wire sizes shall apply and wiring shall be replaced when it does not meet the minimum size.

5. Existing wiring may only be re-used if permitted by Engineer.

3.2. INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLES

1. Use only for drops to fixtures maximum length 3 m in concealed ceiling spaces, or drops to receptacles in GWB partitions maximum length 4.5 m.

2. Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16151.


Phelps Public School 16132 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.1-12 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES - GENERAL

1. Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.

2. 102 mm (4") square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.

3. Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

4. Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

5. Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.

2.2. SHEET STEEL OUTLET BOXES

1. Electro-galvanized steel single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.

2. Electro-galvanized steel utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48 mm

3. 102 mm (4") square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.

4. 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices



in finished tile walls.

2.3. CONDUIT BOXES

1. Cast FS or FD feraloy boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and receptacle.

2. Electro-galvanized utility tape for indoor surface wiring.

2.4. FITTINGS - GENERAL

1. Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.

2. Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

3. Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.

4. Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

2. Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.

3. For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.

4. Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Reducing washers are not allowed.

5. Provide a suitable outlet box for each light, switch, receptacle or other outlet, approved for the particular area in which it is to be installed.

6. Locate outlet boxes, mounted in hung ceiling space, so they do not obstruct or interfere with the removal of lay-in ceiling tiles.

7. Offset outlet boxes, shown back to back in partitions, horizontally to minimize noise transmission between adjacent rooms.

8. Use tile wall covers where 4" square outlet boxes are installed in exposed concrete or cinder block in finished areas.

9. Seal electrical switch and outlet boxes that penetrate vapour barrier with moulded box vapour barrier wrap boxes with film sheet providing minimum 300 mm perimeter lap flange.



10. Provide T-bar grid support brackets for installations on T-bar ceiling.


Phelps Public School 16151 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS - 0 - 1000 V Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. CSA C22.2 No. 65-13 Wire Connectors.

2. EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS

1. Pressure type wire connectors: with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors as required.

2. Fixture type splicing connectors: with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less.

3. Bushing stud connectors: to EEMAC 1Y-2 to consist of:

1. Connector body and stud clamp for stranded copper conductors.

2. Clamp for stranded copper conductors

3. Stud clamp bolts.

4. Bolts for copper conductors

5. Sized for conductors as indicated.

4. Clamps or connectors for armoured cable, flexible conduit, as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and:

1. Apply coat of zinc joint compound on aluminum conductors prior to installation of

Phelps Public School 16151 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and WIRE AND BOX CONNECTIONS - 0 - 1000 V Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 2 of 2


connectors.

2. Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.

3. Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap.

4. Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2.


Phelps Public School 16191 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. RELATED WORK


2. Fastenings and supports: Section 01600 Material and Equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SUPPORT CHANNELS

1. U shape, size 41 x 41 x 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted or suspended.

2. Smaller sections subject to Consultant’s approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Secure equipment to tile and plaster surfaces with nylon anchors, with independent grip protrusions.

2. Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.

3. Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.

4. Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before installation.

5. Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.

6. Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.

1. One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller.

2. Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm.

3. Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

7. Suspended support systems.

Phelps Public School 16191 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 2 of 2


1. Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia threaded rods and spring clips.

2. Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.

8. For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 3 m oc spacing.

9. Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.

10. Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support.

11. Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.

12. Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Consultant.

13. Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.

14. Provide minimum 2400 mm support channel on each suspended fixture in open areas, with rigid stem supports from structure to channel, and fixture secured to channel.

15. All fastenings and supports to be hot dipped galvanized. All cut ends exposing base material to be completely sealed with field applied coating to give equivalent protection prior to installation. Following complete installation, all damage to protective layer to be carefully and completely touched up with same field applied coating.


Phelps Public School 16421 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL



1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.

2. Indicate on shop drawings

1. Floor anchoring method and foundation template.

2. Dimensioned cable entry and exit locations.

3. Dimensioned position and size of bus.

4. Overall length, height and depth.

5. Dimensioned layout of internal and front panel mounted components.

3. Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers and fuses rated 400 A and higher.


1. Provide maintenance data for service entrance board for incorporation into manual specified in Division 1.

2. Submit 3 copies of maintenance data for complete assembly including components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. SERVICE ENTRANCE BOARD

1. Rating: 600V, 3ph, 4 wire, 400A, short circuit current 14 kA (rms symmetrical).

2. Cubicles: free standing, dead front, size as indicated.

3. Barrier metering section from adjoining sections.

4. Provision for installation of power supply authority metering in barriered section, as per power supply authority requirements.



5. Owner’s digital metering.

6. Distribution section.

7. Hinged access panels with captive knurled thumb screws.

8. Bus bars and main connections: tin plated aluminum.

9. Bus from load terminals of main breaker via metering section to main lugs of distribution section.

10. Bus Bracing Rating: minimum 25 kA.

11. All breakers 400A and over are to be single mounted for easier cable / wire bending. Provide additional space as required.

12. Identify phases with colour coding.

13. To be equipped with sprinkler shields.

2.2. MAIN BREAKER

1. Main breaker sized as indicated and as per Section 16477.

2.3. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1. See Section 16477 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.

2.4. PANEL SURGE PROTECTION (SPD)

1. Where indicated, provide integrated surge protection equipment rated 240 000A / phase surge current, EMI/RFI noise attenuation, status indicator lights on each phase, audible alarm, transient counter, push to test, PQ meter, 120 / 208V, 3 phase, meeting industry standards UL 1449, ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1987, NEMA LS-1, OESC and UL 1283.

2. Acceptable Standard: Cutler-Hammer SPD Series

3. Refer to single line diagram for other sizes.

2.5. GROUNDING

1. Copper ground bus extending full width of cubicles and located at the bottom.

2. Lugs at each end of size 4/0 - 350 kcmil grounding cable.

3. Bond non-current carrying metal parts, including switchgear framework, enclosure and



bases to ground bus.

2.6. ELECTRICAL METERING & POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1. Metering device equal to Cutler-Hammer Power XPert 4000.

2. Internet enabled power quality meter, with embedded web server. Built-in capability to send alarm notifications via e-mail without any additional hardware or software upgrades.

3. Monitored and displayed parameters:

1. Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph analysis, export and print.

2. Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive and frequency.

3. Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, TOU, profile, previous month-to-month, week-to-week comparisons, graph analysis, data export and print.

4. Complete with Input / Output card for communication with BMS. Coordinate BMS language with controls contractor on site.

2.7. POWER SUPPLY AUTHORITY METERING

1. Separate compartment and metal raceway for exclusive use of power supply authority metering.

2. Mounting accessories and wiring for metering supplied by Supply Authority:

1. Potential transformers.

2. Current transformers.

3. Watthour meter.

4. Demand meter with kW.h register.

3. Provide dedicated phone line for interval metering. Phone line to be installed in conduit, if required by Supply Authority. Coordinate all requirements with Supply Authority.

4. Provide # 2 AWG insulated bonding conductor from main switchboard to meter cabinet.

5. Provide 15A, 120V receptacle in meter cabinet. Confirm all requirements with Supply Authority.

2.8. FINISHES

1. Apply finishes in accordance with Section 16010.



1. Service entrance board exterior grey.

2. Cubicle interiors: white preferred.

3. Supply 1 spray can touch up enamel, one for each colour.


1. Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

2. Nameplates:

1. White plate, black letters, size 7.

2. Complete board labeled: Main Switchboard.

3. Main disconnect labeled: "Main Breaker".

4. Branch disconnects labeled: "Feeder No. 1", "Feeder No. 2", "Feeder No. 3", as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Locate service entrance board as indicated and bolt to floor. Coordinate location with incoming cables.

2. Provide 100mm concrete housekeeping pad under equipment.

3. Connect main secondary service to main incoming lugs.

4. Connect load terminals of distribution breakers to feeders as indicated.

5. Check factory made connections for mechanical security and electrical continuity.


Phelps Public School 16450 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and GROUNDING - SECONDARY Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. IEEE 837-2002, Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.

2. CSA Z32.1-M1986, Safety in Anaesthetizing Locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EQUIPMENT

1. Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, soft annealed, size as indicated.

2. Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:

1. Grounding and bonding bushings.

2. Protective type clamps.

3. Bolted type conductor connectors.

4. Thermit welded type conductor connectors.

5. Bonding jumpers, straps.

6. Pressure wire connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION GENERAL

1. Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, electrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories, as indicated, to conform to requirements of Consultant. Where EMT is used, run ground wire in conduit.

2. Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Phelps Public School 16450 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and GROUNDING - SECONDARY Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 2 of 2


3. Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.

4. Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs, and to conductive water main using approved grounding device.

5. Soldered joints not permitted.

6. Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both ends to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit.

7. Install flexible ground straps for bus duct enclosure joints, where such bonding is not inherently provided with equipment.

8. Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at single grounding point. Avoid loop connections.

3.2. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

1. Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames of motors, motor control centres, starters, control panels, building steel work, generators, elevators and escalators, distribution panels and outdoor lighting.

3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Perform tests in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

2. Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Consultant and Inspection Authority.

3. Perform tests before energizing electrical system.


Phelps Public School 16471 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1.

2. Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension.

1.3. PLANT ASSEMBLY

1. Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.

2. In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault current that panel including breakers has been built to withstand.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. PANELBOARDS

1. Panelboards: product of one manufacturer.

2. Bus and breaker rated for the following symmetrical interrupting capacity, unless otherwise indicated.

1. 120 / 208 V Panelboards – 10 kA I.C.

3. Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase.

4. Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit breakers as indicated.

5. Each panelboard to be equipped with integral lock and be complete with two keys. All panelboards to be keyed alike.

6. Aluminum bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains.

7. Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers.



8. Trim and door finish: baked grey enamel

9. Surface mounted panelboards not located in electrical or storage rooms shall be supplied with floor to ceiling enclosures to maximum height of 3.6 m to conceal conduit.

10. Provide 15% space for future breakers in all 120/208V panels unless otherwise noted.

2.2. BREAKERS

1. Breakers: to Section 16477 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.

2. Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards except as indicated otherwise.

3. Main breaker: separately mounted on top or bottom to suit cable entry. When mounted vertically, down position should open breaker.

4. Lock-on devices for computer outlets, fire alarm, clock outlet, emergency, door supervisory, intercom, stairway, exit and night light circuits.


1. Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements.

2. Nameplate for each panelboard size 4 engraved, as indicated

3. Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards size 2 engraved, as indicated.

4. Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each circuit.

2.4. ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS

1. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer

2. Schneider

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces.

2. Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards. Where practical, group panelboards on common backboard.



3. Plywood backboard to be painted with fire-retardant paint.

4. In non-combustible construction, provide one layer of 16 mm (5/8”) gypsum wall board behind each panel, full size of panel.

5. Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 16010 - Electrical General Requirements or as indicated.

6. Connect loads to circuits.

7. Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral identified.

3.2. PANELBOARD LAYOUTS

1. Follow panelboard details attached or on drawings, for layout of circuit and breaker sizes wherever possible.

2. Record all changes to panelboard details, and submit as part of As-Built drawing set for review at completion of the project. Insert copies in each maintenance manual.


PANELBOARD SCHEDULE --

WIRE & COND SERVICE BRKR

Load kW CCT. No. CCT. No. Load kW BRKR SERVICE WIRE & COND

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

**C/W Main Breaker as per Riser

CONNECTED LOAD: 252.3 kW

Gymnasium A/C

---

DP1

80.0See Riser

2/E101Boiler 1

spare

See Riser Transformer #1 & Panel ASee Riser

2/E10179.8

--- spare --- ---

---

See Riser

--- ---

--- ---

---spare spare ---

80.0See Riser

2/E101Boiler 2 See Riser

12.5See Riser

2/E101

---

See Riser

--- --- spare ---

--- --- spare ---

MAX. CURRENT: 243.1 Amps

PANEL DESCRIPTION: Panel DP1

PANEL RATING: 400A, 347/600 V, 3P 4W



Load kW CCT. No. CCT. No.

Load kW BRKR SERVICE WIRE & COND

Existing Reconnect Existing Load 15A 0.3 1 2 0.3 15A Reconnect Existing Load Existing


Existing Reconnect Existing Load 15A 0.3 5 6
















A (1 of 2)

30A/2P Reconnect Existing HWT Existing3.4




NOTE: 120V Wire & Conduit sizes noted in this panel schedule are for branch circuit reference information only. Group wiring and derate wiring depending on wire length as per specification sections 16111 and 16122.










Existing Reconnect Ex.Septic Pump Load 30A 0.3 53 54 0.3 15A Reconnect Existing Load Existing

55 56

57 58

59 60

61 62

63 64

65 66

Reconnect Existing Fire Alarm ** 15A** 0.3 67 68

69 70

71 72

73 74

75 76 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15A --- 77 78 --- 20A SPARE ---

30A/2PSPARE--- ---

Water Pump LoadReconnect Existing

SPARE15A/2P--- ---

--- 20A/2P SPARE ---

See Riser4.3

See Riser 2/E101

Panel DSee Riser 23.4See Riser

2/E101Panel E21.4 See Riser

A (2 of 2)

Panel BSee RiserSee Riser

2/E10110.3 Panel C

See Riser

2/E101

30A/2P 1.2

--- space --- --- 79 80 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 81 82 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 83 84 --- --- space ---

** Circuit Breaker to be painted red



PANEL DESCRIPTION: Panel

PANEL RATING: 225A, 120/208 V, 3P 4W - 84 CCT

A (2 of 2)













15 16

17 18

2#12-16mmC Control Valves 15 A 0.1 19 20 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 21 22 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 23 24 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- space --- --- 25 26 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 27 28 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 29 30 --- --- space ---

**C/W Main Breaker As Per Riser 2/E101

CONNECTED LOAD: 10 3 kW

Existing ---

Recessed B


50A/2P Reconnect Existing Stove Existing6.015A/2PSPARE





Recessed B










Existing Reconnect Exist Split Recept 15A 0.3 11 12 0.3 15A Reconnect Existing Load Existing

Existing Reconnect Exist Split Recept 15A 0.3 13 14 --- 20A SPARE ---

Existing Reconnect Existing Load 15A 0.3 15 16 --- 20A SPARE ---

2#12-16mmC Control Valves 15 A 0.1 17 18 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 19 20 --- --- space ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 21 22 --- --- space ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 23 24 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 25 26 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 27 28 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 29 30 --- --- space ---


CONNECTED LOAD: 4 3 kW


Recessed C





Recessed C



















29 30 0.3 15A Reconnect Existing Load Existing

31 32 0.3 15A Reconnect Existing Load Existing



D

40A/2P Reconnect Existing Range Existing6.0

50A/2PReconnect Existing Dishwasher Load

4.2Existing


39 40

41 42

--- SPARE 15 A --- 43 44 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 45 46 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 47 48 --- 20A SPARE ---

49 50

51 52

--- space --- --- 53 54 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 55 56 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 57 58 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 59 60 --- --- space ---




PANEL DESCRIPTION: Panel D

PANEL RATING: 225A, 120/ 208V, 3P 4W - 60 CCT


15A/2PExisting Reconnect Existing Load 15A/2P 1.5 1.5 Reconnect Existing Load Existing

15A/2PSPARE--- --- 20A/2P SPARE--- ---






















35 36

Existing

E

15A/2P Reconnect Existing Dryer3

37 38 1.0 20A SPARE ---

Existing Existing Septic Pump Load 30A 2.5 39 40 1.0 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 41 42 1.0 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 43 44 --- 20A SPARE ---

--- SPARE 15 A --- 45 46

--- SPARE 15 A --- 47 48

49 50

51 52

--- space --- --- 53 54

--- space --- --- 55 56 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 57 58 --- --- space ---

--- space --- --- 59 60 --- --- space ---




PANEL DESCRIPTION: Panel E

PANEL RATING: 225A, 120/ 208V, 3P 4W - 60 CCT

20A/2P SPARE ------

---


30A/2PReconnect Existing Dryer 3

---SPARE30A/3P---

Existing

SPARE 15A/2P---

Phelps Public School 16477 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 1


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. BREAKERS - GENERAL

1. Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick-make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40°C ambient.

2. Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.

3. Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-10 times current rating.

4. Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips on main service entrance breaker, and as indicated.

2.2. THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS

1. Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install circuit breakers as indicated.


Phelps Public School 16519 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and EXIT LIGHTS Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. REFERENCES

1. Atomic Energy Control Board Regulations.

2. Canadian Code for Preferred Packaging.

3. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

1. CSA C22.2 No. 141-M1985(R1992), Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.

2. CSA C860-01, Performance of Internally-Lighted Exit Signs.

4. Natural Resources Canada (NRCan)

1. NRCan C860 Registered.

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) requirements.

1.3. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, limitations and finish.


1. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Division 1, and with Waste Reduction Workplan.

2. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.

3. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

4. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

5. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Phelps Public School 16519 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and EXIT LIGHTS Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 2 of 2


2.1. EXIT LIGHTS - GENERAL

1. Exit lights: to CSA C22.2 No. 141 and CSA C860.

2. Housing: one piece extruded aluminum, baked white enamel finish.

3. Face and back plates: extruded aluminum, baked white enamel finish.

4. Lamps: LED, non-protruding type, maximum 2 watts per face, to operate from 120V emergency lighting circuit.

5. Designed for 25 year life of continuous operation without relamping.

6. Letters: 150 mm high x 19 mm wide, red on white face plate, reading unilingual EXIT.

7. Third lamp socket for emergency lighting circuit, 12 V, dc.

8. Face plate to remain captive for relamping.

9. CSA C860-01 listed and certified model with five year warranty.

10. NRCan Registered.

2.2. DESIGN

1. Universal type for wall, end to wall, or ceiling mounted as required.

2. Number of faces as per drawings.

3. Arrow: both directions, to suit drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install exit lights as indicated, in accordance with OBC 2012.

2. Connect fixtures to exit light circuits as indicated.

3. Connect emergency lamp sockets to emergency circuits as indicated.

4. Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in on position.

5. Provide T-bar grid support brackets for installations on T-bar ceiling.


Phelps Public School 16536 Site Improvements, HVAC, Lighting and UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING Electrical Upgrades Project Number: 6112 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. GENERAL


1.2. PRODUCT DATA

1. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1, including:

1. Electrical data of components, including input and output voltages, operating time, phase, AC and DC ampere ratings.

2. Mounting methods, dimensional outline and accessories.

3. Lamp heads type, watt/ampere, lumen output, horizontal and vertical adjustments.

4. Data for battery, charger and auxiliary instruments and devices.

1.3. DELIVERY

1. Deliver batteries in dry state, unless hermetically sealed.

2. Provide electrolyte in hazard-proof container.

1.4. WARRANTY

1. For batteries, the 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC 32.1 of General Conditions “C” is extended to 120 months, with a no-charge replacement during the first 5 years and a pro-rate charge on the second 5 years.

2. Provide written copy of terms of battery guarantee in maintenance manual, and note date of acceptance for start of guarantee period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EQUIPMENT

1. Unit equipment for emergency lighting: to CSA C22.2 No. 141.

2. Supply voltage: Universal Voltage 120 V AC.

3. Output voltage: 12 V DC.



4. Battery: sealed, maintenance free, sized to 30 min. operation plus 20% spare capacity. Battery capacity to be 360 W, unless otherwise noted.

5. Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01V for plus or minus 10% input variation.

6. Solid state transfer circuit.

7. Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage.

8. Signal lights: solid state, life expectancy 100,000 h minimum, for ‘AC Power ON’ and ‘High Charge’.

9. Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and c/w knockouts for conduit. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries.

10. Finish: white baked enamel.

11. Auxiliary equipment:

1. Lamp disconnect switch.

2. Momentary test switch.

3. Time delay relay.

4. Battery disconnect device.

5. Shelf.

6. Cord and plug connection for ac.

7. Self-diagnostics (auto-test).

2.2. WIRING OF REMOTE HEADS

1. Conduit: type EMT, to Section 16111.

2. Conductors: RW90 type to Section 16122, sized to limit voltage drop to 5%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION

1. Install unit equipment for emergency lighting in accordance with CSA C22.1-12.

2. Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures as indicated.



3. Unit equipment shall be mounted with the bottom of the enclosure not less than 2 meters above the floor.

4. Receptacles to which unit equipment is to be connected shall be not less than 2.5 meters above the floor.

5. Connect exit lights to unit equipment as indicated.

6. Clean all heads and direct as indicated by Consultant at type of acceptance.

7. Test each unit and verify operation of all remote heads.

8. Unit equipment shall be installed in such a manner that it will be automatically actuated upon failure of the power supply to the normal lighting in the area covered by that unit equipment.

9. For all battery units that are equipped with self-diagnostics (auto-test), ensure that the system is connected as per manufacturer’s instructions. Note that some battery packs with self-diagnostics have two circuits and the circuits should be balanced as close as possible for the system to work properly. Also, the DC side of the system must be connected first before the AC is initiated to prevent damage to the circuit board electronics.

10. Provide complete instruction for the operation and maintenance of the unit equipment for emergency lighting as per the OBC and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Instructions to include testing unit equipment at least once a month to ensure proper operation. Installation instructions to be posted on the premises in a frame under glass.


Phelps

Public School

H

I G

H

W

A

Y

N

O

. 6

3

Existing Sand Play Area

G

L

E

N

V

A

L

E

D

R

I

V

E

(

G

R

A

V

E

L

R

O

A

D

)

E

x

i

s

t

i

n

g

S

a

n

d

P

l

a

y

A

r

e

a

SCALE: 1:300b

Site Plan

a

A1.1

E

E E

E

E

E

E

E

E

45008 SPACES @ 2750 = 22000

NEW SPLASH PAD / SWALE

CONSTRUCT NEW ASPHALT PAVED GUTTER / SWALE

c/w COMPACTED GRANULAR BASE AT EXISTING RAIN

WATER LEADER OUTLETS. PROVIDE c/w NEW PRECAST

CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK DIRECTLY UNDER OUTLET.

PROVIDE NEW 1200x1200 x 100mm THICK

POURED CONCRETE PADS c/w NEW GRANULAR

BASE & SUB-BASE AT EXISTING EXIT DOORS

(3 LOCATIONS TOTAL) SET TOP OF PAD

150mm BELOW MAIN FLOOR

EXISTING ACCESS COVERS TO REMAIN

E

SP

SP

INDICATES NEW GAME LINE PAINTING (TYP.)

REFER TO GENERAL NOTE #4

DASHED LINE INDICATES EXISTING ASPHALT GUTTERS

TO BE ELIMINATED. BUILD UP EXISTING GRADE TO

LEVEL OF ASPHALT PAVED PLAY SURFACE AND SLOPE

TO MEET ADJACENT GRASSED AREAS.

REUSE EXISTING SHED & RECYCLING BIN IN

EXISTING LOCATIONS. RESET EXISTING SHED

ON NEW PRECAST CONCRETE DECK BLOCKS

EXISTING CHAIN LINK

FENCING TO REMAIN.

6 SPACES @ 3000 = 18000

15

00

±

NEW 3600mm WIDE

DOUBLE VEHICLE GATE

NEW 1200mm WIDE

MAN GATE

NEW 1200mm HIGH

CHAIN LINK FENCING

REPLACE AREA OF SOD w/ NEW ASPHALT

PAVING c/w NEW GRANULAR BASE &

SUB-BASE.

30009000

APPROXIMATE AREA OF EROSION TO

BE RESTORED w/ NEW 100mm

TOPSOIL AND SOD

EHP

EHP

EXISTING SEPTIC SYSTEM CHAMBERS / TANKS

INDICATES AREA OF OF NEW 100mm THICK CONCRETE

SIDEWALK UNDER EXISTING CANOPIES c/w GRANULAR BASE

AND SUB-BASE PER UNIT PAVER REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE

CONTROL JOINTS AS INDICATED.

9000

60

00

6000

90

00

78

00

±6

00

0

INDICATES SECTION OF NEW 1200mm

HIGH CHAIN LINK FENCING (TOTAL

LENGTH 36.6m) TO REPLACE REMOVED

SNOW FENCING.

900 900

PROVIDE SEPARATE PRICE FOR RECONSTRUCTION OF

EXISTING BASKETBALL COURT. REFER TO a/A1.0 FOR DETAILS.

N

E

W

E

X

I

S

T

I

N

G

4500

NEW LINE

PAINTING

22

00

SPSP

EXISTING

GARBAGE BIN

2900

EXISTING OVERHEAD TELEPHONE

AND ELECTRICAL WIRING TO REMAIN

NEW UNIT PAVER WALKWAY

c/w DOUBLE SOLDIER COURSE

BORDER. REFER ALSO TO LEGEND

19

80

44

95

HATCHING INDICATES AREAS OF NEW ASPHALT PAVING

AND GRANULAR BASE & SUB-BASE. REFER TO LEGEND.

60

00

H

I G

H

W

A

Y

N

O

. 6

3

Asphalt

Basketball

Court

EX. SAND

PLAY AREA

G

L

E

N

V

A

L

E

D

R

I

V

E

DEMOLISH AND REMOVE ALL

EXISTING CONCRETE PADS &

SIDEWALKS COMPLETELY

EXISTING BACKSTOP

TO REMAIN

DEMOLISH & RECONSTRUCT EXISTING BASKETBALL COURT

WITH NEW 50mm ASPHALT PAVING ON NEW 150mm

GRANULAR 'A' BASE AND NEW 200mm GRANULAR 'B'

SUB-BASE. COMPACT BASE AND SUB-BASE TO 100%

S.P.D.D. GRADE NEW COURT w/ CENTRELINE CROWN FOR

DRAINAGE. PROVIDE c/w NEW HALF-COURT AND

BASKETBALL KEY LINE PAINTING. PROVIDE ALSO 2 NEW,

PREMANUFACTURED BASKETBALL POLE AND GOAL

ASSEMBLIES c/w FOUNDATIONS PER DETAIL d/A2.0

EXISTING ASPHALT

SWALES TO BE

REMOVED

REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING

BENCHES AND FOUNDATIONS

E

X

.

S

A

N

D

P

L

A

Y

A

R

E

A

EXISTING SHED TO BE REUSED

INDICATES EXISTING TEMPORARY

'SNOW FENCING' TO BE REMOVED

HATCHING INDICATES APPROXIMATE

EXTENT OF EXISTING ASPHALT

PAVING TO BE REMOVED

BREAK OUT AND REMOVE

EXISTING CONCRETE SIDEWALKS

SCALE: 1:1500

a

Existing / Demolition Plan

E E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

PROVIDE SEPARATE PRICE FOR DEMOLITION AND

RECONSTRUCTION OF THE BASKETBALL COURT

- REFER TO THE TENDER FORM.

15240 ±

24

38

4 ±

REFERT TO a/A2.0 FOR

DEMOLITION PLAN

GENERAL AREA OF EXISTING

SEPTIC CHAMBERS TANKS

DRAWING NO:

Existing/Demolition Plan,

Site Plan, Notes & Legend

This drawing and the design it represents

are protected by copyright law and are

the property of the author. Do not

reproduce or use in any fashion without

written consent. Graphic accuracy of the

drawing cannot be assured. Do not rely

on scaled dimensions.

A1.0

NORTH:

Mitchell Jensen Architects

124a Main Street East

North Bay, ON, P1B 1A8

705.474.3250

Redbridge, ON.


Site Improvments,

HVAC, Lighting and

Electrical Upgrades

Phelps Public

School

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

May 2, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 217102

217102-SP

BD / JD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

GENERAL NOTES:

1. Restore all areas of the site damaged or disturbed

due to work of this contract back to their original

state. Grass areas shall be restored w/ sod & 100mm

topsoil. Seeding not acceptable. Water/maintain sod

until established.

2. Provide new line painting as indicated. Line painting

includes indicated text, directional arrows, symbols

and stall lines.

3. The Contractor is responsible for setting finish grade

elevations. Review all proposed grades and drainage

patterns with Consultant prior to commencing the

Work.

4. Line Painting for Games

Include in the Work, repainting of existing game lines

in the play yard. Game lines to be painted in same

configuration, colours and locations as existing.

Contractor to make arrangements to borrow the

Owner's templates. Include the following in the

quantities noted:

1 - Four Square

1 - Snakes and Ladders

1 - Calculator

2 - Hopscotch

1 - Alphabet Grid

1 - Alphabet Circle

5. Asbestos Abatement

There are existing asbestos containing materials in

the building which may be disturbed by Work

including plaster texture coat, gypsum wallboard

joint compound and pip insulation. Contractor shall

review the asbestos survey included in the

specifications and advise Consultant where

abatement is required and seek direction.

The cost of asbestos abatement, if required, will be

paid from the designated cash allowance specified in

the Section 01 00 01 General Requirements.

E

Legend:

Indicates existing location

of school exterior exit doors

Denotes existing overhead hydro lines

Indicates new unit paver walkways c/w

sand bedding, 150mm granular 'A' base

& 200mm granular 'B' sub-base. Compact

base & sub-base to 100% S.P.D.D.

STANDARD DUTY PAVEMENT

Indicates new 50mm asphalt paving on new

150mm granular 'A' base & 300mm granular

'B' sub-base. Compact base & sub-base to

100% S.P.D.D.

HEAVY DUTY PAVEMENT

Indicates new 50mm asphalt paving and

40mm asphalt binder course on new 150mm

granular 'A' base & 300mm granular 'B'

sub-base. Compact base & sub-base to 100%

S.P.D.D.

Denotes existing hydro pole to remain.

Denotes existing downspout locations.

Provide new precast concrete splashpad.

EHP

SP

S

ARCHITECTS

LICENCEPAUL WILLIAM MITCHELL

TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF

AutoCAD SHX Text

Phelps Public School

AutoCAD SHX Text

4925

SET TOP OF NEW UNIT PAVERS LEVEL w/ TOP OF

MAIN FLOOR SLAB. MAINTAIN PAVERS LEVEL w/

MAXIMUM 0.5% SLOPE FOR DRAINAGE. INSULATE

AREA w/ 100mm RIGID STYROFOAM SM INSULATION.

NEW UNIT

PAVERS

DASHED LINES INDICATE

EXISTING CONCRETE PLANTER

CURBS TO BE DEMOLISHED

EXISTING WALL MOUNTED FLAG

POLES TO REMAIN

100mm THICK NEW

CONCRETE WALKWAY c/w

CONTROL JOINTS, SLOPE TO

DRAIN

NOTE:

LANDING SET @ 152mm

BELOW MAIN FLOOR

EXISTING EXTERIOR STAIR

& LANDING TO BE DEMOLISHED

COMPLETELY

NEW RETAINING WALL

c/w GUARDRAIL.

SCALE: 1:100

a

Enlarged Plan

A1.1

b

FO

R C

ON

TIN

UA

TIO

N R

EFE

R T

O

b

A1

.0

NEW LINE PAINTING

10

50

NEW ASPHALT PAVING

3658

24

00

DOUBLE SOLDIER COURSE UNIT

PAVER BORDER (TYP). SET TOP

FLUSH w/ ADJACENT ASPHALT

PAVEMENT

EXISTING RAIN WATER

LEADER SPOUT

NEW PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH

PADS TO FORM "GUTTER" SET ON

TOP OF NEW UNIT PAVERS

91

4

15

0

5 COURSES INCLUDING

BURIED BASE COURSE

DENOTES NEW CONCRETE

WALKWAY INSIDE OF

RETAINING WALL

c

A1.1

top of

new concrete

SCALE: 1:20b

Elevation

top of

main floor

NEW STEEL GUARDRAIL / HANDRAIL ASSEMBLY.

PROVIDE c/w PAINT FINISH

RETAINING WALL

COPING

3 EQUAL SPACINGS

RETAINING WALL

COPING

TYPICAL

FULLY ADHERE ALL

COURSES OF BLOCK

TYPICAL GUARDRAIL

-50mm SQUARE STEEL TUBE POSTS

-50mm TOP AND BOTTOM RAILS.

-13mm SQUARE STEEL PICKETS @ 110mm o.c. max.

STEEL BASE PLATE ANCHORED TO

COPING w\ 2-12.7mm Ø X 152mm

STAINLESS STEEL HILTI KWIK

BOLTS (MIN)

SCALE: 1:10

c

Elevation

38mm DIAMETER STEEL

HANDRAIL

top of

new concrete

-varies

91

4

50

10mm DIAMETER

SUPPORT BRACKETS

NEW CONCRETE WALKWAY

VA

RIE

S9

20

VA

RIE

S

NEW 460mmØ POURED CONCRETE PIER

FOUNDATION

"BIGFOOT" FOOTING FORM

NEW PREMANUFACTURED BASKETBALL BACKSTOP ASSEMBLY

(POST, BACKBOARD & GOAL)

"BBIG-01 SYSTEM AS MANUFACTURED BY SPORTS SYSTEMS

CANADA. 2 (TWO) TOTAL REQUIRED

NEW ASPHALT PAVING

18

00

SCALE: 1:20d

Basketball Standard Section

DRAWING NO:

Site Details








A2.0




705.474.3250

Redbridge, ON.

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

May 2, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 217102

217102-SP

BD / JD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

GENERAL NOTES:

1. For General Notes refer to Drawing A1.0

NORTH:


Site Improvments,

HVAC, Lighting and

Electrical Upgrades

Phelps Public

School

S

ARCHITECTS


TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF

AutoCAD SHX Text

4925

Lav

SCALE: 1:200

a

Floor Plan

REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND EXTENT OF EXISTING HYDRONIC HEATING PIPING

TO BE REMOVED & NEW PIPING TO BE INSTALLED IN EXISTING CEILING SPACES. GENERAL CONTRACTOR

TO DISMANTLE AND REINSTALL EXISTING ACOUSTIC TILE CEILINGS AS REQUIRED TO FACILITATE PIPING

REPLACEMENT. PARTIALLY DISMANTLE AND REINSTATE EXISTING CEILINGS AS REQUIRED TO SUIT NEW

PIPING INSTALLATION. EXISTING FIBREBOARD TILE SUB-CEILING TO REMAIN. PATCH AND MAKE GOOD

ANY REMOVED TILE BY REINSTALLING REMOVED TILE OR REPLACING WITH 15.9mm TYPE X GYPSUM

WALLBOARD.

IN AREAS OF EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND BULKHEADS, GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CUT AND

PATCH EXISTING DRYWALL CEILINGS AND BULKHEADS AS REQUIRED TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION OF NEW

PIPING. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO ALSO PROVIDE NEW FRAMING FOR AND INSTALL NEW CEILING

ACCESS DOORS PROVIDED BY Div.15. COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS WITH Div.15.

FOLLOWING PATCHING OF CEILINGS/BULKHEADS, PROVIDE NEW PAINT FINISH TO ENTIRE PLANE OF

AFFECTED CEILINGS TO MATCH EXISTING.

NOTE: SOME EXISTING PIPE INSULATION IS ASBESTOS CONTAINING. REFER TO GENERAL NOTE #5 ON

DRAWING A1.0

EXISTING BUILT-IN MILLWORK TO BE

REMOVED TO FACILITATE RADIANT HOT

WATER HEATING PIPING REPLACEMENT.

REPLACE w/ NEW MILLWORK AS DETAILED.

A3.0

c

d

A3.0

A3.0b

e

A3.0

DIVISION 06 TO CONSTRUCT NEW HYDRONIC

PIPE ENCLOSURE FROM POPLAR TRIM. REMOVE

& REINSTALL 2 EXISTING BULLETIN BOARDS AS

REQUIRED TO FULLY CLEAR NEW HYDRONIC

HEATING PIPE ENCLOSURE. SHORTEN BOARDS

IF REQUIRED. DETACH EXISTING "CLOTHESLINE"

PULLEY & REMOUNT TO NEW PIPE ENCLOSURE

REMOVE & REINSTALL 2 EXISTING

BULLETIN BOARDS AS REQUIRED

TO FULLY CLEAR NEW HYDRONIC

PIPE ENCLOSURE. SHORTEN BOARDS

IF REQUIRED.

SCALE: 1:25b

Elevation

f

A3.0

FILLER STRIP

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

(TYP.)

ACCESS PANEL BY Div. 15

FILLER PANEL

760 TYP.

C

L

C

L

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP


SCALE: 1:25

c

Elevation

g

A3.0

BACKSPLASH

NEW HYDRONIC HEATING PIPE

ENCLOSURE FROM 19mm THICK

SOLID POPLAR c/w PAINT FINISH

2 EQ. DIV. = 1200±

DOORS c/w PULLS

& LOCKS

RUBBER FLOORING BASE

ON KICKPLATE

SINK - REFER TO MECHANICAL

DRAWINGS FOR REQUIREMENTS.

SCALE: 1:25d

Elevation

f

A3.0

FILLER STRIP

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

(TYP.)

FILLER PANEL

752 TYP.

C

L

C

L

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP


SCALE: 1:25

e

Elevation

f

A3.0

FILLER STRIP

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

(TYP.)

FILLER PANEL

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP


756 TYP.

C

L

C

L

12 EQ. DIVISIONS = 9200±

13 EQ. DIVISIONS = 9850± 5 EQ. DIVISIONS = 3860±


ENCLOSURE BY Div. 06

NEW LINEAR BAR GRILLES (6 SECTIONS TOTAL)

IN KICKSPACE


IN KICKSPACE


IN KICKSPACE

SIDESPLASH

EXISTING TALL STORAGE

CABINET TO REMAIN

FILLER STRIP TO SUIT

-

SCALE: 1:25b

Elevation

f

A3.0

FILLER STRIP

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

(TYP.)


FILLER PANEL

760 TYP.

C

L

C

L

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP


SCALE: 1:25

c

Elevation

g

A3.0

BACKSPLASH


ENCLOSURE FROM 19mm THICK

SOLID POPLAR c/w PAINT FINISH

2 EQ. DIV. = 1200±

DOORS c/w PULLS

& LOCKS

RUBBER FLOORING BASE

ON KICKPLATE

SINK - REFER TO MECHANICAL

DRAWINGS FOR REQUIREMENTS.

SCALE: 1:25d

Elevation

f

A3.0

FILLER STRIP

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

(TYP.)

FILLER PANEL

752 TYP.

C

L

C

L

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP


SCALE: 1:25

e

Elevation

f

A3.0

FILLER STRIP

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

(TYP.)

FILLER PANEL

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP


756 TYP.

C

L

C

L

12 EQ. DIVISIONS = 9200±

13 EQ. DIVISIONS = 9850± 5 EQ. DIVISIONS = 3860±


ENCLOSURE BY Div. 06


IN KICKSPACE


IN KICKSPACE


IN KICKSPACE

SIDESPLASH

EXISTING TALL STORAGE

CABINET TO REMAIN

FILLER STRIP TO SUIT

-

140

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP c/w

DOUBLE ROUND-OVER NOSING

EXISTING EXTERIOR

WALL

NEW FIN RADIATION

BY Div.15

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES

95

0±

SUPPORTS - SPACING TO SUIT,

PAINTED BLACK

RECESSED PILASTER

STRIPS c/w SHELF CLIPS

COORDINATE w/ Div.15

NEW CONTINUOUS PAINTED

POPLAR TRIM

MAINTAIN CLEAR, OPEN

PATH FOR VENTILATION.

SCALE: 1:10f

Section

DOORS c/w PULLS

& LOCKS

SINK - REFER TO

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.

POST FORMED PLASTIC

LAMINATE COUNTERTOP

c/w DOUBLE ROUND OVER

NOSING & BACKSPLASH

NEW RUBBER FLOORING

BASE ON KICKPLATE

CONTINUOUS

SEALANT

SCALE: 1:10

g

Section

EXISTING WALL

CASE BODIES & GABLES

REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS

ACCESS PANEL

BY Div.15

50

EXISTING BASEBOARD TO

REMAIN

EXISTING WINDOWS

WHERE APPLICABLE

NEW CLEAT AS REQUIRED

NEW CONTINUOUS

PREMANUFACTURED LINEAR BAR

GRILLE BY SECTION 06 40 00

15

0

10

0

610

91

41

00

NEW CONTINUOUS

PREMANUFACTURED LINEAR BAR

GRILLE BY SECTION 06 40 00

432

DRAWING NO:

Architectural Floor Plan,

Millwork Details








A3.0




705.474.3250

Redbridge, ON.

NO.

1

Issued for Tender

ISSUE DATE

May 2, 2018

DRAWN BY:

LIBRARY NO:

SCALE:

PROJECT NO: 217102

217102-SP

JD

as noted

MITCHELL

JENSEN

ARCHITECTS

GENERAL NOTES:

1. For General Notes refer to Drawing A1.0

NORTH:


Site Improvments,

HVAC, Lighting and

Electrical Upgrades

Phelps Public

School

S

ARCHITECTS


TAO

N

ASIOR IO

NO IAC

TOF

AutoCAD SHX Text

Photocopy

AutoCAD SHX Text

Secretary

AutoCAD SHX Text

Principal

AutoCAD SHX Text

Corridor

AutoCAD SHX Text

Teacher's Supply Room

AutoCAD SHX Text

Boiler Room

AutoCAD SHX Text

Jr. Kind. & Sr. Kind. Play Room

AutoCAD SHX Text

FDK Classroom

AutoCAD SHX Text

Classroom

AutoCAD SHX Text

Day Care

AutoCAD SHX Text

Gym Equipment Storage

AutoCAD SHX Text

Storage

AutoCAD SHX Text

General Purpose Room

AutoCAD SHX Text

Lunch Room & Stage

AutoCAD SHX Text

Kit.

AutoCAD SHX Text

Storage

AutoCAD SHX Text

Computer Room

AutoCAD SHX Text

Classroom

AutoCAD SHX Text

Classroom

AutoCAD SHX Text

Internet Lab

AutoCAD SHX Text

Library

AutoCAD SHX Text

Boiler Room

AutoCAD SHX Text

Girls

AutoCAD SHX Text

Boys

AutoCAD SHX Text

Staff

AutoCAD SHX Text

Water Room

AutoCAD SHX Text

Storage

AutoCAD SHX Text

Classroom

AutoCAD SHX Text

Classroom

AutoCAD SHX Text

Classroom

AutoCAD SHX Text

Custodian

AutoCAD SHX Text

Girls

AutoCAD SHX Text

Boys

AutoCAD SHX Text

CHAIR LIFT

AutoCAD SHX Text

DN

AutoCAD SHX Text

Special Needs W.R.

AutoCAD SHX Text

4925

BCIN # 29003